{"title":"Garden Storage Sheds","description":"\u003cp\u003eGarden storage sheds are the answer for when a storage box or outdoor storage box simply isn't enough. This range covers walk-in buildings on the larger sizes and step-in models on the smaller ones, so you can match the shed to both the space you have and the way you want to use it. Pent roofs suit narrow spaces and boundaries, while apex roofs give the classic lines many gardens call for.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eEvery garden shed here is lockable as standard and weatherproof as standard, with floors rated to hold a workshop bench rather than just light tools. That makes them equally suited to secure garden storage, a potting space or a small workshop. Match the footprint to your plot, prepare a firm and level base first, and leave access around the outside for maintenance and to free up room from bulkier wheelie bin storage.\u003c\/p\u003e","products":[{"product_id":"4x8-garden-shed-grey","title":"4x8 Garden Shed — Grey","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eA galvanised steel shed with a powder-coat finish — tidy, honest storage for tools, mowers and garden kit.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBuilt from 0.4mm galvanised steel with a powder-coat finish on top of the zinc layer. That's two barriers between the steel and the weather, which is why the panels don't rust-bloom at the cut edges the way budget alternatives do. Pre-drilled panels and clearly numbered parts keep the flat-pack assembly predictable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIntegrated gable vents stop condensation building up. The floor panels are rated for a walk-behind mower, a mid-size BBQ or a pair of adult bikes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat's included\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e \u003cli\u003e1 × 4×8ft garden shed (flat-packed)\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eReinforced floor panel and fixings\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eSpring-latch door with retrofit hasp\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eGable vent(s)\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eNumbered panels, hardware pack and printed instructions\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDesigned for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e \u003cli\u003eHand tools, a walk-behind mower and garden-power kit\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eBike and tool combined storage where floor space is tight\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003ePotting, hobby or general outdoor workshop space\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCare \u0026amp; maintenance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWipe clean with a damp cloth. Check bolts once a year, and touch up any exposed steel with enamel paint if a knock breaks the powder-coat. Re-seal the base perimeter if standing water starts to show.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"seo-content\"\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhere this fits in the range\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 4x8 Garden Shed — Grey is from our plastic shed collection. The decisions you make at purchase — material, size, base preparation, security — determine whether you'll thank yourself in 10 years' time or be replacing the unit halfway through.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePlastic and resin construction — what UV-stabilised resin buys you\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlastic garden storage covers a wide quality range. The cheap end is commodity HDPE engineered for two summers; the 4x8 Garden Shed — Grey sits at the other end — UV-stabilised resin engineered for ten or more.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe differences that determine lifetime:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV stabilisation\u003c\/strong\u003e — additives in the polymer formulation that resist breakdown from sunlight. Without these, plastic goes chalky in 18 months and brittle in 3–4 years. Stabilised plastic stays flexible and structurally sound for a decade or more.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWall thickness\u003c\/strong\u003e — quality resin units use 4mm+ walls, visible at the lid lip. Cheap commodity plastic is 2–3mm and flexes when leaned on.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFrost rating\u003c\/strong\u003e — stabilised resin handles -20°C without cracking. Commodity HDPE goes brittle at -5°C and cracks under impact.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSealed joinery\u003c\/strong\u003e — corner joints and lid gaskets that keep water out. The mark of an engineered product, not a moulded plastic shell.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe differences are usually invisible at the marketing level — manufacturers don't volunteer \"we use cheap plastic\" — but they show up unmistakably after the first 18 months in a UK garden.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSizing and what fits\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe exact dimensions and capacity for this product are in the specifications above. As a general guide for our sheds range:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFootprint\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWhat fits\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4×3 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMower + basic tools\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6×4 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMower, strimmer, hand tools, 1 bike\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8×6 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 bikes, tools, BBQ, garden chairs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10×8 ft+\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorkshop space + storage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInternal dimensions are what matter for fit; external dimensions matter for placement clearance. Quoted capacity is brim-full; usable capacity is roughly 70-80% of that, since you can't pack to the lid and expect to retrieve bottom items.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eUK weather considerations\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBritish gardens see 1,000-1,200mm of annual rainfall, frost cycling between -5°C and +10°C through winter, and summer UV exposure that damages unstabilised materials. The 4x8 Garden Shed — Grey is engineered against those specific conditions. Practical implications:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFrost\u003c\/strong\u003e — products in this range are rated for sustained sub-zero temperatures without cracking. The cheap alternatives aren't.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV\u003c\/strong\u003e — UV-stabilised plastics, hot-dip galvanised metal, and pressure-treated timber all handle UK summer sun. Commodity equivalents fail visibly within 2–3 years.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWind\u003c\/strong\u003e — exposed gardens (hilltops, coastal locations, wide gardens with no windbreaks) need anchoring. Most products in this range include floor anchor points; use them.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDriving rain\u003c\/strong\u003e — sealed lid gaskets and overhung roof edges keep wind-driven rain out. Look for these features specifically if your site is exposed.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBase preparation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe single most-skipped step on outdoor storage installation. All sheds need a level, solid base. Three good options: concrete slab (gold standard, 25-year base), paving flags on hardcore (cheaper, perfectly fine for sheds up to 8×6 ft), or a pressure-treated timber base on bearers for slightly uneven ground. Don't put a shed directly on grass.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDon't put any storage unit directly on grass. The base will move; lid seals will fail; condensation underneath will accelerate component failure. Plan the base before ordering the product.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDelivery and assembly\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis product ships from our UK warehouse with free mainland delivery on orders over £100. Standard delivery is 5–7 working days, tracked. This product ships pallet-direct to your kerbside. The driver won't bring the pallet down a path, up steps, or inside. Plan for help moving it from the kerb — two people minimum, or a pallet truck for the very largest. You'll get a dispatch email with a tracking link; the courier will text or email a delivery window the day before.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAssembly is the bigger task in this category — 2-3 hours for sheds up to 6×4 ft with two people, longer for larger units. You'll want a screwdriver, a 10mm spanner, a level, and a step-ladder for the roof. Manufacturer-quoted times tend to be optimistic by 30-50% on first build. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/assembly\"\u003eassembly help page\u003c\/a\u003e for tools, time estimates, and where to book a Tasker if you'd rather not DIY.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eReturns and consumer protection\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEvery order is covered by your full UK consumer protections:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConsumer Rights Act 2015\u003c\/strong\u003e — the goods must be of satisfactory quality, fit for purpose, and as described. Your statutory rights apply automatically and never expire.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConsumer Contracts Regulations 2013\u003c\/strong\u003e — 14 days from receipt to change your mind, no reason needed. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/returns\"\u003ereturns page\u003c\/a\u003e for the process.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e30-day damaged-on-arrival guarantee\u003c\/strong\u003e — if anything's wrong on delivery, email us with photos and we'll arrange a free replacement or full refund including return postage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor order questions, delivery updates, or post-purchase support, email \u003ca href=\"mailto:hello@garden-storage.com\"\u003ehello@garden-storage.com\u003c\/a\u003e or call \u003ca href=\"tel:+447383567839\"\u003e+44 7383 567839\u003c\/a\u003e Mon–Fri 9am–5pm. We respond to email within one UK working day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCommon questions about sheds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDo I need planning permission?\u003c\/strong\u003e In England, sheds under 2.5m high covering less than 50% of garden area are usually permitted development. Conservation Areas, listed buildings and AONBs have stricter rules — check with your council.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat's covered by the warranty?\u003c\/strong\u003e Manufacturer-specific structural warranties apply (typically 5-10 years for plastic, 10-20 for metal galvanised). Your Consumer Rights Act 2015 protections apply on top — satisfactory quality, fit for purpose, as described — and never expire.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow does insurance work for stored contents?\u003c\/strong\u003e Most home contents policies cover items in outbuildings up to a stated limit (often £1,000-£3,000), with conditions about lock type and structure. Check your policy schedule before storing anything high-value.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor more on sheds, see our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/garden-storage-sheds\"\u003esheds buying guide\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Garden Storage","offers":[{"title":"4x6ft \/ Grey","offer_id":57903887253849,"sku":"GSH-4X6FT-GREY-04","price":318.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"4x6ft \/ Green","offer_id":57903887286617,"sku":"GSH-4X6FT-GREEN-04","price":318.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"4x8ft \/ Grey","offer_id":57903887319385,"sku":"GSH-4X8FT-GREY-04","price":317.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"4x8ft \/ Green","offer_id":57903887352153,"sku":"GSH-4X8FT-GREEN-04","price":317.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1041\/5557\/8713\/files\/Se13343277eed49878ee211067a62441aJ.webp?v=1776959144"},{"product_id":"4x6-waterproof-garden-shed-grey","title":"4x6 Waterproof Garden Shed — Grey","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eA pressure-treated timber shed with sealed joints and drainage detailing, built to see out a British winter.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBuilt from FSC-certified pine, pressure-treated against rot and rebuffed with a smooth planed finish. The cladding is 12mm — thicker than the high-street budget kits — and the corners are rebated rather than simply butt-jointed, so the frame stays square once it's up. Re-treat every two to three years with a clear wood oil and it'll outlast most plastic alternatives.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSealed joints and drainage channels at the base keep the inside dry even in sustained rain. The floor panels are rated for a walk-behind mower, a mid-size BBQ or a pair of adult bikes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat's included\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e \u003cli\u003e1 × 4×6ft garden shed (flat-packed)\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eReinforced floor panel and fixings\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eSpring-latch door with retrofit hasp\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eRidge detail for passive airflow\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eNumbered panels, hardware pack and printed instructions\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDesigned for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e \u003cli\u003eHand tools, a walk-behind mower and garden-power kit\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eBike and tool combined storage where floor space is tight\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003ePotting, hobby or general outdoor workshop space\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCare \u0026amp; maintenance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRe-treat every two to three years with a clear wood oil or decking stain — the pressure-treatment is the first line of defence, not the only one. Keep the base off saturated ground if you can, and wipe clean with a damp cloth as needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"seo-content\"\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eThe bigger picture\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBuying a garden shed is one of those decisions you live with for years. 4x6 Waterproof Garden Shed — Grey sits in our plastic category, which has specific characteristics worth understanding before purchase. The product specs above tell you what; the section below tells you why those specs matter and what to expect over the unit's lifetime.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePlastic and resin construction — what UV-stabilised resin buys you\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlastic garden storage covers a wide quality range. The cheap end is commodity HDPE engineered for two summers; the 4x6 Waterproof Garden Shed — Grey sits at the other end — UV-stabilised resin engineered for ten or more.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe differences that determine lifetime:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV stabilisation\u003c\/strong\u003e — additives in the polymer formulation that resist breakdown from sunlight. Without these, plastic goes chalky in 18 months and brittle in 3–4 years. Stabilised plastic stays flexible and structurally sound for a decade or more.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWall thickness\u003c\/strong\u003e — quality resin units use 4mm+ walls, visible at the lid lip. Cheap commodity plastic is 2–3mm and flexes when leaned on.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFrost rating\u003c\/strong\u003e — stabilised resin handles -20°C without cracking. Commodity HDPE goes brittle at -5°C and cracks under impact.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSealed joinery\u003c\/strong\u003e — corner joints and lid gaskets that keep water out. The mark of an engineered product, not a moulded plastic shell.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe differences are usually invisible at the marketing level — manufacturers don't volunteer \"we use cheap plastic\" — but they show up unmistakably after the first 18 months in a UK garden.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSizing and what fits\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe exact dimensions and capacity for this product are in the specifications above. As a general guide for our sheds range:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFootprint\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWhat fits\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4×3 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMower + basic tools\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6×4 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMower, strimmer, hand tools, 1 bike\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8×6 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 bikes, tools, BBQ, garden chairs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10×8 ft+\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorkshop space + storage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInternal dimensions are what matter for fit; external dimensions matter for placement clearance. Quoted capacity is brim-full; usable capacity is roughly 70-80% of that, since you can't pack to the lid and expect to retrieve bottom items.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eUK weather considerations\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBritish gardens see 1,000-1,200mm of annual rainfall, frost cycling between -5°C and +10°C through winter, and summer UV exposure that damages unstabilised materials. The 4x6 Waterproof Garden Shed — Grey is engineered against those specific conditions. Practical implications:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFrost\u003c\/strong\u003e — products in this range are rated for sustained sub-zero temperatures without cracking. The cheap alternatives aren't.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV\u003c\/strong\u003e — UV-stabilised plastics, hot-dip galvanised metal, and pressure-treated timber all handle UK summer sun. Commodity equivalents fail visibly within 2–3 years.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWind\u003c\/strong\u003e — exposed gardens (hilltops, coastal locations, wide gardens with no windbreaks) need anchoring. Most products in this range include floor anchor points; use them.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDriving rain\u003c\/strong\u003e — sealed lid gaskets and overhung roof edges keep wind-driven rain out. Look for these features specifically if your site is exposed.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBase preparation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe single most-skipped step on outdoor storage installation. All sheds need a level, solid base. Three good options: concrete slab (gold standard, 25-year base), paving flags on hardcore (cheaper, perfectly fine for sheds up to 8×6 ft), or a pressure-treated timber base on bearers for slightly uneven ground. Don't put a shed directly on grass.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDon't put any storage unit directly on grass. The base will move; lid seals will fail; condensation underneath will accelerate component failure. Plan the base before ordering the product.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDelivery and assembly\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis product ships from our UK warehouse with free mainland delivery on orders over £100. Standard delivery is 5–7 working days, tracked. This product ships pallet-direct to your kerbside. The driver won't bring the pallet down a path, up steps, or inside. Plan for help moving it from the kerb — two people minimum, or a pallet truck for the very largest. You'll get a dispatch email with a tracking link; the courier will text or email a delivery window the day before.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAssembly is the bigger task in this category — 2-3 hours for sheds up to 6×4 ft with two people, longer for larger units. You'll want a screwdriver, a 10mm spanner, a level, and a step-ladder for the roof. Manufacturer-quoted times tend to be optimistic by 30-50% on first build. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/assembly\"\u003eassembly help page\u003c\/a\u003e for tools, time estimates, and where to book a Tasker if you'd rather not DIY.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eReturns and consumer protection\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEvery order is covered by your full UK consumer protections:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConsumer Rights Act 2015\u003c\/strong\u003e — the goods must be of satisfactory quality, fit for purpose, and as described. Your statutory rights apply automatically and never expire.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConsumer Contracts Regulations 2013\u003c\/strong\u003e — 14 days from receipt to change your mind, no reason needed. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/returns\"\u003ereturns page\u003c\/a\u003e for the process.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e30-day damaged-on-arrival guarantee\u003c\/strong\u003e — if anything's wrong on delivery, email us with photos and we'll arrange a free replacement or full refund including return postage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor order questions, delivery updates, or post-purchase support, email \u003ca href=\"mailto:hello@garden-storage.com\"\u003ehello@garden-storage.com\u003c\/a\u003e or call \u003ca href=\"tel:+447383567839\"\u003e+44 7383 567839\u003c\/a\u003e Mon–Fri 9am–5pm. We respond to email within one UK working day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCommon questions about sheds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDo I need planning permission?\u003c\/strong\u003e In England, sheds under 2.5m high covering less than 50% of garden area are usually permitted development. Conservation Areas, listed buildings and AONBs have stricter rules — check with your council.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat's covered by the warranty?\u003c\/strong\u003e Manufacturer-specific structural warranties apply (typically 5-10 years for plastic, 10-20 for metal galvanised). Your Consumer Rights Act 2015 protections apply on top — satisfactory quality, fit for purpose, as described — and never expire.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow does insurance work for stored contents?\u003c\/strong\u003e Most home contents policies cover items in outbuildings up to a stated limit (often £1,000-£3,000), with conditions about lock type and structure. Check your policy schedule before storing anything high-value.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor more on sheds, see our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/garden-storage-sheds\"\u003esheds buying guide\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Garden Storage","offers":[{"title":"4x6 ft","offer_id":57903894298969,"sku":"GSH-4X6FT-GREY-05","price":129.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"5x7 ft","offer_id":57903894331737,"sku":"GSH-5X7FT-GREY-05","price":159.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"6x6 ft","offer_id":57903894364505,"sku":"GSH-6X6FT-GREY-05","price":172.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"8x8 ft","offer_id":57903894397273,"sku":"GSH-8X8FT-GREY-05","price":242.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"10x10 ft","offer_id":57903894430041,"sku":"GSH-10X10FT-GREY-05","price":324.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"8x12 ft","offer_id":57903894462809,"sku":"GSH-8X12FT-GREY-05","price":324.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1041\/5557\/8713\/files\/4x6-waterproof-garden-shed-grey-1-standardised_93e0dcf1-8042-4af3-8265-92fadd7e0f49.png?v=1776965497"},{"product_id":"6-9x6-4-lockable-garden-shed-white","title":"6.9x6.4 Lockable Garden Shed — White","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eA pressure-treated FSC pine shed with tongue-and-groove cladding — real carpentry, not just screwed panels.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBuilt from FSC-certified pine, pressure-treated against rot and rebuffed with a smooth planed finish. The cladding is 12mm — thicker than the high-street budget kits — and the corners are rebated rather than simply butt-jointed, so the frame stays square once it's up. Re-treat every two to three years with a clear wood oil and it'll outlast most plastic alternatives.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe door has a reinforced frame and a pre-fitted hasp so you can add your own Sold Secure padlock (sold separately). The floor panels are rated for a walk-behind mower, a mid-size BBQ or a pair of adult bikes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat's included\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e1 × 6.9×6.4ft garden shed (flat-packed)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eReinforced floor panel and fixings\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eLockable door with reinforced frame\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eRidge detail for passive airflow\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eNumbered panels, hardware pack and printed instructions\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDesigned for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eHand tools, a walk-behind mower and garden-power kit\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eBike and tool combined storage where floor space is tight\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003ePotting, hobby or general outdoor workshop space\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eLocked storage for valuable tools or bikes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCare \u0026amp; maintenance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRe-treat every two to three years with a clear wood oil or decking stain — the pressure-treatment is the first line of defence, not the only one. Keep the base off saturated ground if you can, and wipe clean with a damp cloth as needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"seo-content\"\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhere this fits in the range\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 6.9x6.4 Lockable Garden Shed — White is from our plastic shed collection. The decisions you make at purchase — material, size, base preparation, security — determine whether you'll thank yourself in 10 years' time or be replacing the unit halfway through.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePlastic and resin construction — what UV-stabilised resin buys you\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlastic garden storage covers a wide quality range. The cheap end is commodity HDPE engineered for two summers; the 6.9x6.4 Lockable Garden Shed — White sits at the other end — UV-stabilised resin engineered for ten or more.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe differences that determine lifetime:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV stabilisation\u003c\/strong\u003e — additives in the polymer formulation that resist breakdown from sunlight. Without these, plastic goes chalky in 18 months and brittle in 3–4 years. Stabilised plastic stays flexible and structurally sound for a decade or more.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWall thickness\u003c\/strong\u003e — quality resin units use 4mm+ walls, visible at the lid lip. Cheap commodity plastic is 2–3mm and flexes when leaned on.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFrost rating\u003c\/strong\u003e — stabilised resin handles -20°C without cracking. Commodity HDPE goes brittle at -5°C and cracks under impact.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSealed joinery\u003c\/strong\u003e — corner joints and lid gaskets that keep water out. The mark of an engineered product, not a moulded plastic shell.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe differences are usually invisible at the marketing level — manufacturers don't volunteer \"we use cheap plastic\" — but they show up unmistakably after the first 18 months in a UK garden.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSizing and what fits\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe exact dimensions and capacity for this product are in the specifications above. As a general guide for our sheds range:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFootprint\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWhat fits\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4×3 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMower + basic tools\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6×4 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMower, strimmer, hand tools, 1 bike\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8×6 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 bikes, tools, BBQ, garden chairs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10×8 ft+\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorkshop space + storage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInternal dimensions are what matter for fit; external dimensions matter for placement clearance. Quoted capacity is brim-full; usable capacity is roughly 70-80% of that, since you can't pack to the lid and expect to retrieve bottom items.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eUK weather considerations\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBritish gardens see 1,000-1,200mm of annual rainfall, frost cycling between -5°C and +10°C through winter, and summer UV exposure that damages unstabilised materials. The 6.9x6.4 Lockable Garden Shed — White is engineered against those specific conditions. Practical implications:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFrost\u003c\/strong\u003e — products in this range are rated for sustained sub-zero temperatures without cracking. The cheap alternatives aren't.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV\u003c\/strong\u003e — UV-stabilised plastics, hot-dip galvanised metal, and pressure-treated timber all handle UK summer sun. Commodity equivalents fail visibly within 2–3 years.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWind\u003c\/strong\u003e — exposed gardens (hilltops, coastal locations, wide gardens with no windbreaks) need anchoring. Most products in this range include floor anchor points; use them.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDriving rain\u003c\/strong\u003e — sealed lid gaskets and overhung roof edges keep wind-driven rain out. Look for these features specifically if your site is exposed.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBase preparation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe single most-skipped step on outdoor storage installation. All sheds need a level, solid base. Three good options: concrete slab (gold standard, 25-year base), paving flags on hardcore (cheaper, perfectly fine for sheds up to 8×6 ft), or a pressure-treated timber base on bearers for slightly uneven ground. Don't put a shed directly on grass.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDon't put any storage unit directly on grass. The base will move; lid seals will fail; condensation underneath will accelerate component failure. Plan the base before ordering the product.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDelivery and assembly\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis product ships from our UK warehouse with free mainland delivery on orders over £100. Standard delivery is 5–7 working days, tracked. This product ships pallet-direct to your kerbside. The driver won't bring the pallet down a path, up steps, or inside. Plan for help moving it from the kerb — two people minimum, or a pallet truck for the very largest. You'll get a dispatch email with a tracking link; the courier will text or email a delivery window the day before.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAssembly is the bigger task in this category — 2-3 hours for sheds up to 6×4 ft with two people, longer for larger units. You'll want a screwdriver, a 10mm spanner, a level, and a step-ladder for the roof. Manufacturer-quoted times tend to be optimistic by 30-50% on first build. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/assembly\"\u003eassembly help page\u003c\/a\u003e for tools, time estimates, and where to book a Tasker if you'd rather not DIY.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eReturns and consumer protection\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEvery order is covered by your full UK consumer protections:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConsumer Rights Act 2015\u003c\/strong\u003e — the goods must be of satisfactory quality, fit for purpose, and as described. Your statutory rights apply automatically and never expire.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConsumer Contracts Regulations 2013\u003c\/strong\u003e — 14 days from receipt to change your mind, no reason needed. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/returns\"\u003ereturns page\u003c\/a\u003e for the process.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e30-day damaged-on-arrival guarantee\u003c\/strong\u003e — if anything's wrong on delivery, email us with photos and we'll arrange a free replacement or full refund including return postage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor order questions, delivery updates, or post-purchase support, email \u003ca href=\"mailto:hello@garden-storage.com\"\u003ehello@garden-storage.com\u003c\/a\u003e or call \u003ca href=\"tel:+447383567839\"\u003e+44 7383 567839\u003c\/a\u003e Mon–Fri 9am–5pm. We respond to email within one UK working day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCommon questions about sheds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDo I need planning permission?\u003c\/strong\u003e In England, sheds under 2.5m high covering less than 50% of garden area are usually permitted development. Conservation Areas, listed buildings and AONBs have stricter rules — check with your council.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat's covered by the warranty?\u003c\/strong\u003e Manufacturer-specific structural warranties apply (typically 5-10 years for plastic, 10-20 for metal galvanised). Your Consumer Rights Act 2015 protections apply on top — satisfactory quality, fit for purpose, as described — and never expire.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow does insurance work for stored contents?\u003c\/strong\u003e Most home contents policies cover items in outbuildings up to a stated limit (often £1,000-£3,000), with conditions about lock type and structure. Check your policy schedule before storing anything high-value.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor more on sheds, see our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/garden-storage-sheds\"\u003esheds buying guide\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Garden Storage","offers":[{"title":"Small floor","offer_id":57903894626649,"sku":"GSH-SMALLFLOOR-WHITE-06","price":698.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Medium floor","offer_id":57903894659417,"sku":"GSH-MEDIUMFLOO-WHITE-06","price":836.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Large floor","offer_id":57903894692185,"sku":"GSH-LARGEFLOOR-WHITE-06","price":823.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Small 136x98x196cm","offer_id":57903894724953,"sku":"GSH-SMALL136X9-WHITE-06","price":1498.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Medium 176x98x196cm","offer_id":57903894757721,"sku":"GSH-MEDIUM176X-WHITE-06","price":1498.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Large 176x140x196cm","offer_id":57903894790489,"sku":"GSH-LARGE176X1-WHITE-06","price":1498.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1041\/5557\/8713\/files\/S2eb1db83f7f740f3acc3e43dcd351cb9d.webp?v=1776959148"},{"product_id":"7x4-lockable-garden-shed-brown","title":"7x4 Lockable Garden Shed — Brown","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eA galvanised steel shed with a powder-coat finish — tidy, honest storage for tools, mowers and garden kit.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBuilt from 0.4mm galvanised steel with a powder-coat finish on top of the zinc layer. That's two barriers between the steel and the weather, which is why the panels don't rust-bloom at the cut edges the way budget alternatives do. Pre-drilled panels and clearly numbered parts keep the flat-pack assembly predictable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe door has a reinforced frame and a pre-fitted hasp so you can add your own Sold Secure padlock (sold separately). The floor panels are rated for a walk-behind mower, a mid-size BBQ or a pair of adult bikes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat's included\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e1 × 7×4ft garden shed (flat-packed)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eReinforced floor panel and fixings\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eLockable door with reinforced frame\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eRidge detail for passive airflow\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eNumbered panels, hardware pack and printed instructions\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDesigned for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eHand tools, a walk-behind mower and garden-power kit\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eBike and tool combined storage where floor space is tight\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003ePotting, hobby or general outdoor workshop space\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eLocked storage for valuable tools or bikes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCare \u0026amp; maintenance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWipe clean with a damp cloth. Check bolts once a year, and touch up any exposed steel with enamel paint if a knock breaks the powder-coat. Re-seal the base perimeter if standing water starts to show.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"seo-content\"\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhere this fits in the range\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 7x4 Lockable Garden Shed — Brown is from our plastic shed collection. The decisions you make at purchase — material, size, base preparation, security — determine whether you'll thank yourself in 10 years' time or be replacing the unit halfway through.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePlastic and resin construction — what UV-stabilised resin buys you\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlastic garden storage covers a wide quality range. The cheap end is commodity HDPE engineered for two summers; the 7x4 Lockable Garden Shed — Brown sits at the other end — UV-stabilised resin engineered for ten or more.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe differences that determine lifetime:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV stabilisation\u003c\/strong\u003e — additives in the polymer formulation that resist breakdown from sunlight. Without these, plastic goes chalky in 18 months and brittle in 3–4 years. Stabilised plastic stays flexible and structurally sound for a decade or more.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWall thickness\u003c\/strong\u003e — quality resin units use 4mm+ walls, visible at the lid lip. Cheap commodity plastic is 2–3mm and flexes when leaned on.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFrost rating\u003c\/strong\u003e — stabilised resin handles -20°C without cracking. Commodity HDPE goes brittle at -5°C and cracks under impact.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSealed joinery\u003c\/strong\u003e — corner joints and lid gaskets that keep water out. The mark of an engineered product, not a moulded plastic shell.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe differences are usually invisible at the marketing level — manufacturers don't volunteer \"we use cheap plastic\" — but they show up unmistakably after the first 18 months in a UK garden.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSizing and what fits\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe exact dimensions and capacity for this product are in the specifications above. As a general guide for our sheds range:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFootprint\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWhat fits\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4×3 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMower + basic tools\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6×4 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMower, strimmer, hand tools, 1 bike\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8×6 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 bikes, tools, BBQ, garden chairs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10×8 ft+\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorkshop space + storage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInternal dimensions are what matter for fit; external dimensions matter for placement clearance. Quoted capacity is brim-full; usable capacity is roughly 70-80% of that, since you can't pack to the lid and expect to retrieve bottom items.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eUK weather considerations\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBritish gardens see 1,000-1,200mm of annual rainfall, frost cycling between -5°C and +10°C through winter, and summer UV exposure that damages unstabilised materials. The 7x4 Lockable Garden Shed — Brown is engineered against those specific conditions. Practical implications:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFrost\u003c\/strong\u003e — products in this range are rated for sustained sub-zero temperatures without cracking. The cheap alternatives aren't.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV\u003c\/strong\u003e — UV-stabilised plastics, hot-dip galvanised metal, and pressure-treated timber all handle UK summer sun. Commodity equivalents fail visibly within 2–3 years.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWind\u003c\/strong\u003e — exposed gardens (hilltops, coastal locations, wide gardens with no windbreaks) need anchoring. Most products in this range include floor anchor points; use them.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDriving rain\u003c\/strong\u003e — sealed lid gaskets and overhung roof edges keep wind-driven rain out. Look for these features specifically if your site is exposed.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBase preparation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe single most-skipped step on outdoor storage installation. All sheds need a level, solid base. Three good options: concrete slab (gold standard, 25-year base), paving flags on hardcore (cheaper, perfectly fine for sheds up to 8×6 ft), or a pressure-treated timber base on bearers for slightly uneven ground. Don't put a shed directly on grass.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDon't put any storage unit directly on grass. The base will move; lid seals will fail; condensation underneath will accelerate component failure. Plan the base before ordering the product.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDelivery and assembly\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis product ships from our UK warehouse with free mainland delivery on orders over £100. Standard delivery is 5–7 working days, tracked. This product ships pallet-direct to your kerbside. The driver won't bring the pallet down a path, up steps, or inside. Plan for help moving it from the kerb — two people minimum, or a pallet truck for the very largest. You'll get a dispatch email with a tracking link; the courier will text or email a delivery window the day before.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAssembly is the bigger task in this category — 2-3 hours for sheds up to 6×4 ft with two people, longer for larger units. You'll want a screwdriver, a 10mm spanner, a level, and a step-ladder for the roof. Manufacturer-quoted times tend to be optimistic by 30-50% on first build. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/assembly\"\u003eassembly help page\u003c\/a\u003e for tools, time estimates, and where to book a Tasker if you'd rather not DIY.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eReturns and consumer protection\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEvery order is covered by your full UK consumer protections:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConsumer Rights Act 2015\u003c\/strong\u003e — the goods must be of satisfactory quality, fit for purpose, and as described. Your statutory rights apply automatically and never expire.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConsumer Contracts Regulations 2013\u003c\/strong\u003e — 14 days from receipt to change your mind, no reason needed. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/returns\"\u003ereturns page\u003c\/a\u003e for the process.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e30-day damaged-on-arrival guarantee\u003c\/strong\u003e — if anything's wrong on delivery, email us with photos and we'll arrange a free replacement or full refund including return postage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor order questions, delivery updates, or post-purchase support, email \u003ca href=\"mailto:hello@garden-storage.com\"\u003ehello@garden-storage.com\u003c\/a\u003e or call \u003ca href=\"tel:+447383567839\"\u003e+44 7383 567839\u003c\/a\u003e Mon–Fri 9am–5pm. We respond to email within one UK working day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCommon questions about sheds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDo I need planning permission?\u003c\/strong\u003e In England, sheds under 2.5m high covering less than 50% of garden area are usually permitted development. Conservation Areas, listed buildings and AONBs have stricter rules — check with your council.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat's covered by the warranty?\u003c\/strong\u003e Manufacturer-specific structural warranties apply (typically 5-10 years for plastic, 10-20 for metal galvanised). Your Consumer Rights Act 2015 protections apply on top — satisfactory quality, fit for purpose, as described — and never expire.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow does insurance work for stored contents?\u003c\/strong\u003e Most home contents policies cover items in outbuildings up to a stated limit (often £1,000-£3,000), with conditions about lock type and structure. Check your policy schedule before storing anything high-value.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor more on sheds, see our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/garden-storage-sheds\"\u003esheds buying guide\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Garden Storage","offers":[{"title":"Brown","offer_id":57903894921561,"sku":"GSH-7X4FT-BROWN-07","price":296.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1041\/5557\/8713\/files\/S85687687ec2b42caa601fcce0f0da5afq.webp?v=1776959152"},{"product_id":"11x5-6-lockable-garden-shed-grey","title":"11x5.6 Lockable Garden Shed — Grey","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eA pressure-treated FSC pine shed with tongue-and-groove cladding — real carpentry, not just screwed panels.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBuilt from FSC-certified pine, pressure-treated against rot and rebuffed with a smooth planed finish. The cladding is 12mm — thicker than the high-street budget kits — and the corners are rebated rather than simply butt-jointed, so the frame stays square once it's up. Re-treat every two to three years with a clear wood oil and it'll outlast most plastic alternatives.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe door has a reinforced frame and a pre-fitted hasp so you can add your own Sold Secure padlock (sold separately). The floor panels are rated for a walk-behind mower, a mid-size BBQ or a pair of adult bikes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat's included\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e1 × 11×5.6ft garden shed (flat-packed)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eReinforced floor panel and fixings\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eLockable door with reinforced frame\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eRidge detail for passive airflow\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eNumbered panels, hardware pack and printed instructions\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDesigned for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eHand tools, a walk-behind mower and garden-power kit\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eBike and tool combined storage where floor space is tight\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003ePotting, hobby or general outdoor workshop space\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eLocked storage for valuable tools or bikes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCare \u0026amp; maintenance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRe-treat every two to three years with a clear wood oil or decking stain — the pressure-treatment is the first line of defence, not the only one. Keep the base off saturated ground if you can, and wipe clean with a damp cloth as needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"seo-content\"\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat this means for your garden\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 11x5.6 Lockable Garden Shed — Grey is one of our plastic sheds, sized and engineered for typical UK garden use. A shed is the kind of purchase you make once and keep for a decade — or twice in five years if you buy badly. The notes below explain the full lifecycle picture and where this product sits within it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePlastic and resin construction — what UV-stabilised resin buys you\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlastic garden storage covers a wide quality range. The cheap end is commodity HDPE engineered for two summers; the 11x5.6 Lockable Garden Shed — Grey sits at the other end — UV-stabilised resin engineered for ten or more.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe differences that determine lifetime:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV stabilisation\u003c\/strong\u003e — additives in the polymer formulation that resist breakdown from sunlight. Without these, plastic goes chalky in 18 months and brittle in 3–4 years. Stabilised plastic stays flexible and structurally sound for a decade or more.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWall thickness\u003c\/strong\u003e — quality resin units use 4mm+ walls, visible at the lid lip. Cheap commodity plastic is 2–3mm and flexes when leaned on.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFrost rating\u003c\/strong\u003e — stabilised resin handles -20°C without cracking. Commodity HDPE goes brittle at -5°C and cracks under impact.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSealed joinery\u003c\/strong\u003e — corner joints and lid gaskets that keep water out. The mark of an engineered product, not a moulded plastic shell.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe differences are usually invisible at the marketing level — manufacturers don't volunteer \"we use cheap plastic\" — but they show up unmistakably after the first 18 months in a UK garden.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSizing and what fits\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe exact dimensions and capacity for this product are in the specifications above. As a general guide for our sheds range:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFootprint\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWhat fits\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4×3 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMower + basic tools\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6×4 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMower, strimmer, hand tools, 1 bike\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8×6 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 bikes, tools, BBQ, garden chairs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10×8 ft+\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorkshop space + storage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInternal dimensions are what matter for fit; external dimensions matter for placement clearance. Quoted capacity is brim-full; usable capacity is roughly 70-80% of that, since you can't pack to the lid and expect to retrieve bottom items.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eUK weather considerations\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBritish gardens see 1,000-1,200mm of annual rainfall, frost cycling between -5°C and +10°C through winter, and summer UV exposure that damages unstabilised materials. The 11x5.6 Lockable Garden Shed — Grey is engineered against those specific conditions. Practical implications:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFrost\u003c\/strong\u003e — products in this range are rated for sustained sub-zero temperatures without cracking. The cheap alternatives aren't.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV\u003c\/strong\u003e — UV-stabilised plastics, hot-dip galvanised metal, and pressure-treated timber all handle UK summer sun. Commodity equivalents fail visibly within 2–3 years.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWind\u003c\/strong\u003e — exposed gardens (hilltops, coastal locations, wide gardens with no windbreaks) need anchoring. Most products in this range include floor anchor points; use them.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDriving rain\u003c\/strong\u003e — sealed lid gaskets and overhung roof edges keep wind-driven rain out. Look for these features specifically if your site is exposed.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBase preparation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe single most-skipped step on outdoor storage installation. All sheds need a level, solid base. Three good options: concrete slab (gold standard, 25-year base), paving flags on hardcore (cheaper, perfectly fine for sheds up to 8×6 ft), or a pressure-treated timber base on bearers for slightly uneven ground. Don't put a shed directly on grass.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDon't put any storage unit directly on grass. The base will move; lid seals will fail; condensation underneath will accelerate component failure. Plan the base before ordering the product.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDelivery and assembly\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis product ships from our UK warehouse with free mainland delivery on orders over £100. Standard delivery is 5–7 working days, tracked. This product ships pallet-direct to your kerbside. The driver won't bring the pallet down a path, up steps, or inside. Plan for help moving it from the kerb — two people minimum, or a pallet truck for the very largest. You'll get a dispatch email with a tracking link; the courier will text or email a delivery window the day before.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAssembly is the bigger task in this category — 2-3 hours for sheds up to 6×4 ft with two people, longer for larger units. You'll want a screwdriver, a 10mm spanner, a level, and a step-ladder for the roof. Manufacturer-quoted times tend to be optimistic by 30-50% on first build. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/assembly\"\u003eassembly help page\u003c\/a\u003e for tools, time estimates, and where to book a Tasker if you'd rather not DIY.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eReturns and consumer protection\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEvery order is covered by your full UK consumer protections:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConsumer Rights Act 2015\u003c\/strong\u003e — the goods must be of satisfactory quality, fit for purpose, and as described. Your statutory rights apply automatically and never expire.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConsumer Contracts Regulations 2013\u003c\/strong\u003e — 14 days from receipt to change your mind, no reason needed. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/returns\"\u003ereturns page\u003c\/a\u003e for the process.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e30-day damaged-on-arrival guarantee\u003c\/strong\u003e — if anything's wrong on delivery, email us with photos and we'll arrange a free replacement or full refund including return postage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor order questions, delivery updates, or post-purchase support, email \u003ca href=\"mailto:hello@garden-storage.com\"\u003ehello@garden-storage.com\u003c\/a\u003e or call \u003ca href=\"tel:+447383567839\"\u003e+44 7383 567839\u003c\/a\u003e Mon–Fri 9am–5pm. We respond to email within one UK working day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCommon questions about sheds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDo I need planning permission?\u003c\/strong\u003e In England, sheds under 2.5m high covering less than 50% of garden area are usually permitted development. Conservation Areas, listed buildings and AONBs have stricter rules — check with your council.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat's covered by the warranty?\u003c\/strong\u003e Manufacturer-specific structural warranties apply (typically 5-10 years for plastic, 10-20 for metal galvanised). Your Consumer Rights Act 2015 protections apply on top — satisfactory quality, fit for purpose, as described — and never expire.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow does insurance work for stored contents?\u003c\/strong\u003e Most home contents policies cover items in outbuildings up to a stated limit (often £1,000-£3,000), with conditions about lock type and structure. Check your policy schedule before storing anything high-value.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor more on sheds, see our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/garden-storage-sheds\"\u003esheds buying guide\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Garden Storage","offers":[{"title":"Grey","offer_id":57903895183705,"sku":"GSH-11X5p6FT-GREY-08","price":560.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1041\/5557\/8713\/files\/S79e1c458434946d698515cd704bdd933s.webp?v=1776959152"},{"product_id":"6x4-lockable-garden-shed-grey","title":"6x4 Lockable Garden Shed — Grey","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eA UV-stabilised resin shed that shrugs off rain, doesn't rot and never needs repainting.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMoulded from UV-stabilised resin — the same material we use across our waterproof range, chosen because it doesn't rot, doesn't fade and never needs re-staining. Panels are thicker than most at this price point and joints are sealed rather than painted over, so water genuinely can't creep in.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe door has a reinforced frame and a pre-fitted hasp so you can add your own Sold Secure padlock (sold separately). Integrated gable vents stop condensation building up. The floor panels are rated for a walk-behind mower, a mid-size BBQ or a pair of adult bikes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat's included\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e1 × 6×4ft garden shed (flat-packed)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eReinforced floor panel and fixings\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eLockable door with reinforced frame\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eGable vent(s)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eNumbered panels, hardware pack and printed instructions\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDesigned for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eHand tools, a walk-behind mower and garden-power kit\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eBike and tool combined storage where floor space is tight\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003ePotting, hobby or general outdoor workshop space\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eLocked storage for valuable tools or bikes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCare \u0026amp; maintenance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWipe clean with a damp cloth and mild detergent. No annual re-treatment needed; the resin is UV-stabilised so colour fade is minimal. Avoid solvents and power-washing at close range.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"seo-content\"\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eThe bigger picture\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBuying a garden shed is one of those decisions you live with for years. 6x4 Lockable Garden Shed — Grey sits in our plastic category, which has specific characteristics worth understanding before purchase. The product specs above tell you what; the section below tells you why those specs matter and what to expect over the unit's lifetime.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePlastic and resin construction — what UV-stabilised resin buys you\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlastic garden storage covers a wide quality range. The cheap end is commodity HDPE engineered for two summers; the 6x4 Lockable Garden Shed — Grey sits at the other end — UV-stabilised resin engineered for ten or more.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe differences that determine lifetime:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV stabilisation\u003c\/strong\u003e — additives in the polymer formulation that resist breakdown from sunlight. Without these, plastic goes chalky in 18 months and brittle in 3–4 years. Stabilised plastic stays flexible and structurally sound for a decade or more.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWall thickness\u003c\/strong\u003e — quality resin units use 4mm+ walls, visible at the lid lip. Cheap commodity plastic is 2–3mm and flexes when leaned on.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFrost rating\u003c\/strong\u003e — stabilised resin handles -20°C without cracking. Commodity HDPE goes brittle at -5°C and cracks under impact.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSealed joinery\u003c\/strong\u003e — corner joints and lid gaskets that keep water out. The mark of an engineered product, not a moulded plastic shell.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe differences are usually invisible at the marketing level — manufacturers don't volunteer \"we use cheap plastic\" — but they show up unmistakably after the first 18 months in a UK garden.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSizing and what fits\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe exact dimensions and capacity for this product are in the specifications above. As a general guide for our sheds range:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFootprint\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWhat fits\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4×3 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMower + basic tools\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6×4 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMower, strimmer, hand tools, 1 bike\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8×6 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 bikes, tools, BBQ, garden chairs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10×8 ft+\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorkshop space + storage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInternal dimensions are what matter for fit; external dimensions matter for placement clearance. Quoted capacity is brim-full; usable capacity is roughly 70-80% of that, since you can't pack to the lid and expect to retrieve bottom items.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eUK weather considerations\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBritish gardens see 1,000-1,200mm of annual rainfall, frost cycling between -5°C and +10°C through winter, and summer UV exposure that damages unstabilised materials. The 6x4 Lockable Garden Shed — Grey is engineered against those specific conditions. Practical implications:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFrost\u003c\/strong\u003e — products in this range are rated for sustained sub-zero temperatures without cracking. The cheap alternatives aren't.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV\u003c\/strong\u003e — UV-stabilised plastics, hot-dip galvanised metal, and pressure-treated timber all handle UK summer sun. Commodity equivalents fail visibly within 2–3 years.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWind\u003c\/strong\u003e — exposed gardens (hilltops, coastal locations, wide gardens with no windbreaks) need anchoring. Most products in this range include floor anchor points; use them.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDriving rain\u003c\/strong\u003e — sealed lid gaskets and overhung roof edges keep wind-driven rain out. Look for these features specifically if your site is exposed.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBase preparation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe single most-skipped step on outdoor storage installation. All sheds need a level, solid base. Three good options: concrete slab (gold standard, 25-year base), paving flags on hardcore (cheaper, perfectly fine for sheds up to 8×6 ft), or a pressure-treated timber base on bearers for slightly uneven ground. Don't put a shed directly on grass.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDon't put any storage unit directly on grass. The base will move; lid seals will fail; condensation underneath will accelerate component failure. Plan the base before ordering the product.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDelivery and assembly\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis product ships from our UK warehouse with free mainland delivery on orders over £100. Standard delivery is 5–7 working days, tracked. This product ships pallet-direct to your kerbside. The driver won't bring the pallet down a path, up steps, or inside. Plan for help moving it from the kerb — two people minimum, or a pallet truck for the very largest. You'll get a dispatch email with a tracking link; the courier will text or email a delivery window the day before.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAssembly is the bigger task in this category — 2-3 hours for sheds up to 6×4 ft with two people, longer for larger units. You'll want a screwdriver, a 10mm spanner, a level, and a step-ladder for the roof. Manufacturer-quoted times tend to be optimistic by 30-50% on first build. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/assembly\"\u003eassembly help page\u003c\/a\u003e for tools, time estimates, and where to book a Tasker if you'd rather not DIY.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eReturns and consumer protection\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEvery order is covered by your full UK consumer protections:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConsumer Rights Act 2015\u003c\/strong\u003e — the goods must be of satisfactory quality, fit for purpose, and as described. Your statutory rights apply automatically and never expire.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConsumer Contracts Regulations 2013\u003c\/strong\u003e — 14 days from receipt to change your mind, no reason needed. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/returns\"\u003ereturns page\u003c\/a\u003e for the process.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e30-day damaged-on-arrival guarantee\u003c\/strong\u003e — if anything's wrong on delivery, email us with photos and we'll arrange a free replacement or full refund including return postage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor order questions, delivery updates, or post-purchase support, email \u003ca href=\"mailto:hello@garden-storage.com\"\u003ehello@garden-storage.com\u003c\/a\u003e or call \u003ca href=\"tel:+447383567839\"\u003e+44 7383 567839\u003c\/a\u003e Mon–Fri 9am–5pm. We respond to email within one UK working day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCommon questions about sheds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDo I need planning permission?\u003c\/strong\u003e In England, sheds under 2.5m high covering less than 50% of garden area are usually permitted development. Conservation Areas, listed buildings and AONBs have stricter rules — check with your council.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat's covered by the warranty?\u003c\/strong\u003e Manufacturer-specific structural warranties apply (typically 5-10 years for plastic, 10-20 for metal galvanised). Your Consumer Rights Act 2015 protections apply on top — satisfactory quality, fit for purpose, as described — and never expire.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow does insurance work for stored contents?\u003c\/strong\u003e Most home contents policies cover items in outbuildings up to a stated limit (often £1,000-£3,000), with conditions about lock type and structure. Check your policy schedule before storing anything high-value.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor more on sheds, see our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/garden-storage-sheds\"\u003esheds buying guide\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Garden Storage","offers":[{"title":"6x4ft","offer_id":57903895314777,"sku":"GSH-6X4FT-GREY-09","price":539.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"4x8ft","offer_id":57903895347545,"sku":"GSH-4X8FT-GREY-09","price":499.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1041\/5557\/8713\/files\/Sdf7153ee8cf94c1a8d5d7fdc06665bf2P.webp?v=1776959155"},{"product_id":"8x8-garden-shed-grey","title":"8x8 Garden Shed — Grey","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eA galvanised steel shed with a powder-coat finish — tidy, honest storage for tools, mowers and garden kit.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBuilt from 0.4mm galvanised steel with a powder-coat finish on top of the zinc layer. That's two barriers between the steel and the weather, which is why the panels don't rust-bloom at the cut edges the way budget alternatives do. Pre-drilled panels and clearly numbered parts keep the flat-pack assembly predictable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe floor panels are rated for a walk-behind mower, a mid-size BBQ or a pair of adult bikes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat's included\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e \u003cli\u003e1 × 8×8ft garden shed (flat-packed)\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eReinforced floor panel and fixings\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eSpring-latch door with retrofit hasp\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eRidge detail for passive airflow\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eNumbered panels, hardware pack and printed instructions\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDesigned for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e \u003cli\u003eHand tools, a walk-behind mower and garden-power kit\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eBike and tool combined storage where floor space is tight\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003ePotting, hobby or general outdoor workshop space\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCare \u0026amp; maintenance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWipe clean with a damp cloth. Check bolts once a year, and touch up any exposed steel with enamel paint if a knock breaks the powder-coat. Re-seal the base perimeter if standing water starts to show.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"seo-content\"\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhere this fits in the range\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 8x8 Garden Shed — Grey is from our plastic shed collection. The decisions you make at purchase — material, size, base preparation, security — determine whether you'll thank yourself in 10 years' time or be replacing the unit halfway through.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePlastic and resin construction — what UV-stabilised resin buys you\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlastic garden storage covers a wide quality range. The cheap end is commodity HDPE engineered for two summers; the 8x8 Garden Shed — Grey sits at the other end — UV-stabilised resin engineered for ten or more.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe differences that determine lifetime:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV stabilisation\u003c\/strong\u003e — additives in the polymer formulation that resist breakdown from sunlight. Without these, plastic goes chalky in 18 months and brittle in 3–4 years. Stabilised plastic stays flexible and structurally sound for a decade or more.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWall thickness\u003c\/strong\u003e — quality resin units use 4mm+ walls, visible at the lid lip. Cheap commodity plastic is 2–3mm and flexes when leaned on.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFrost rating\u003c\/strong\u003e — stabilised resin handles -20°C without cracking. Commodity HDPE goes brittle at -5°C and cracks under impact.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSealed joinery\u003c\/strong\u003e — corner joints and lid gaskets that keep water out. The mark of an engineered product, not a moulded plastic shell.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe differences are usually invisible at the marketing level — manufacturers don't volunteer \"we use cheap plastic\" — but they show up unmistakably after the first 18 months in a UK garden.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSizing and what fits\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe exact dimensions and capacity for this product are in the specifications above. As a general guide for our sheds range:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFootprint\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWhat fits\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4×3 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMower + basic tools\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6×4 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMower, strimmer, hand tools, 1 bike\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8×6 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 bikes, tools, BBQ, garden chairs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10×8 ft+\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorkshop space + storage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInternal dimensions are what matter for fit; external dimensions matter for placement clearance. Quoted capacity is brim-full; usable capacity is roughly 70-80% of that, since you can't pack to the lid and expect to retrieve bottom items.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eUK weather considerations\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBritish gardens see 1,000-1,200mm of annual rainfall, frost cycling between -5°C and +10°C through winter, and summer UV exposure that damages unstabilised materials. The 8x8 Garden Shed — Grey is engineered against those specific conditions. Practical implications:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFrost\u003c\/strong\u003e — products in this range are rated for sustained sub-zero temperatures without cracking. The cheap alternatives aren't.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV\u003c\/strong\u003e — UV-stabilised plastics, hot-dip galvanised metal, and pressure-treated timber all handle UK summer sun. Commodity equivalents fail visibly within 2–3 years.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWind\u003c\/strong\u003e — exposed gardens (hilltops, coastal locations, wide gardens with no windbreaks) need anchoring. Most products in this range include floor anchor points; use them.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDriving rain\u003c\/strong\u003e — sealed lid gaskets and overhung roof edges keep wind-driven rain out. Look for these features specifically if your site is exposed.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBase preparation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe single most-skipped step on outdoor storage installation. All sheds need a level, solid base. Three good options: concrete slab (gold standard, 25-year base), paving flags on hardcore (cheaper, perfectly fine for sheds up to 8×6 ft), or a pressure-treated timber base on bearers for slightly uneven ground. Don't put a shed directly on grass.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDon't put any storage unit directly on grass. The base will move; lid seals will fail; condensation underneath will accelerate component failure. Plan the base before ordering the product.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDelivery and assembly\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis product ships from our UK warehouse with free mainland delivery on orders over £100. Standard delivery is 5–7 working days, tracked. This product ships pallet-direct to your kerbside. The driver won't bring the pallet down a path, up steps, or inside. Plan for help moving it from the kerb — two people minimum, or a pallet truck for the very largest. You'll get a dispatch email with a tracking link; the courier will text or email a delivery window the day before.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAssembly is the bigger task in this category — 2-3 hours for sheds up to 6×4 ft with two people, longer for larger units. You'll want a screwdriver, a 10mm spanner, a level, and a step-ladder for the roof. Manufacturer-quoted times tend to be optimistic by 30-50% on first build. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/assembly\"\u003eassembly help page\u003c\/a\u003e for tools, time estimates, and where to book a Tasker if you'd rather not DIY.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eReturns and consumer protection\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEvery order is covered by your full UK consumer protections:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConsumer Rights Act 2015\u003c\/strong\u003e — the goods must be of satisfactory quality, fit for purpose, and as described. Your statutory rights apply automatically and never expire.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConsumer Contracts Regulations 2013\u003c\/strong\u003e — 14 days from receipt to change your mind, no reason needed. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/returns\"\u003ereturns page\u003c\/a\u003e for the process.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e30-day damaged-on-arrival guarantee\u003c\/strong\u003e — if anything's wrong on delivery, email us with photos and we'll arrange a free replacement or full refund including return postage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor order questions, delivery updates, or post-purchase support, email \u003ca href=\"mailto:hello@garden-storage.com\"\u003ehello@garden-storage.com\u003c\/a\u003e or call \u003ca href=\"tel:+447383567839\"\u003e+44 7383 567839\u003c\/a\u003e Mon–Fri 9am–5pm. We respond to email within one UK working day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCommon questions about sheds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDo I need planning permission?\u003c\/strong\u003e In England, sheds under 2.5m high covering less than 50% of garden area are usually permitted development. Conservation Areas, listed buildings and AONBs have stricter rules — check with your council.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat's covered by the warranty?\u003c\/strong\u003e Manufacturer-specific structural warranties apply (typically 5-10 years for plastic, 10-20 for metal galvanised). Your Consumer Rights Act 2015 protections apply on top — satisfactory quality, fit for purpose, as described — and never expire.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow does insurance work for stored contents?\u003c\/strong\u003e Most home contents policies cover items in outbuildings up to a stated limit (often £1,000-£3,000), with conditions about lock type and structure. Check your policy schedule before storing anything high-value.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor more on sheds, see our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/garden-storage-sheds\"\u003esheds buying guide\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Garden Storage","offers":[{"title":"Grey","offer_id":57903895445849,"sku":"GSH-8X8FT-GREY-10","price":416.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1041\/5557\/8713\/files\/S3eba0807fd1e4171be1392f1fb64be5bV.webp?v=1776959157"},{"product_id":"13x11-lockable-garden-shed-grey","title":"13x11 Lockable Garden Shed — Grey","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eA galvanised steel shed with a powder-coat finish — tidy, honest storage for tools, mowers and garden kit.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBuilt from 0.4mm galvanised steel with a powder-coat finish on top of the zinc layer. That's two barriers between the steel and the weather, which is why the panels don't rust-bloom at the cut edges the way budget alternatives do. Pre-drilled panels and clearly numbered parts keep the flat-pack assembly predictable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe door has a reinforced frame and a pre-fitted hasp so you can add your own Sold Secure padlock (sold separately). Integrated gable vents stop condensation building up. The floor panels are rated for a walk-behind mower, a mid-size BBQ or a pair of adult bikes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat's included\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e1 × 13×11ft garden shed (flat-packed)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eReinforced floor panel and fixings\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eLockable door with reinforced frame\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eGable vent(s)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eNumbered panels, hardware pack and printed instructions\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDesigned for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eHand tools, a walk-behind mower and garden-power kit\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eBike and tool combined storage where floor space is tight\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003ePotting, hobby or general outdoor workshop space\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eLocked storage for valuable tools or bikes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCare \u0026amp; maintenance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWipe clean with a damp cloth. Check bolts once a year, and touch up any exposed steel with enamel paint if a knock breaks the powder-coat. Re-seal the base perimeter if standing water starts to show.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"seo-content\"\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eThe bigger picture\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBuying a garden shed is one of those decisions you live with for years. 13x11 Lockable Garden Shed — Grey sits in our plastic category, which has specific characteristics worth understanding before purchase. The product specs above tell you what; the section below tells you why those specs matter and what to expect over the unit's lifetime.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePlastic and resin construction — what UV-stabilised resin buys you\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlastic garden storage covers a wide quality range. The cheap end is commodity HDPE engineered for two summers; the 13x11 Lockable Garden Shed — Grey sits at the other end — UV-stabilised resin engineered for ten or more.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe differences that determine lifetime:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV stabilisation\u003c\/strong\u003e — additives in the polymer formulation that resist breakdown from sunlight. Without these, plastic goes chalky in 18 months and brittle in 3–4 years. Stabilised plastic stays flexible and structurally sound for a decade or more.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWall thickness\u003c\/strong\u003e — quality resin units use 4mm+ walls, visible at the lid lip. Cheap commodity plastic is 2–3mm and flexes when leaned on.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFrost rating\u003c\/strong\u003e — stabilised resin handles -20°C without cracking. Commodity HDPE goes brittle at -5°C and cracks under impact.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSealed joinery\u003c\/strong\u003e — corner joints and lid gaskets that keep water out. The mark of an engineered product, not a moulded plastic shell.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe differences are usually invisible at the marketing level — manufacturers don't volunteer \"we use cheap plastic\" — but they show up unmistakably after the first 18 months in a UK garden.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSizing and what fits\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe exact dimensions and capacity for this product are in the specifications above. As a general guide for our sheds range:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFootprint\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWhat fits\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4×3 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMower + basic tools\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6×4 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMower, strimmer, hand tools, 1 bike\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8×6 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 bikes, tools, BBQ, garden chairs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10×8 ft+\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorkshop space + storage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInternal dimensions are what matter for fit; external dimensions matter for placement clearance. Quoted capacity is brim-full; usable capacity is roughly 70-80% of that, since you can't pack to the lid and expect to retrieve bottom items.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eUK weather considerations\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBritish gardens see 1,000-1,200mm of annual rainfall, frost cycling between -5°C and +10°C through winter, and summer UV exposure that damages unstabilised materials. The 13x11 Lockable Garden Shed — Grey is engineered against those specific conditions. Practical implications:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFrost\u003c\/strong\u003e — products in this range are rated for sustained sub-zero temperatures without cracking. The cheap alternatives aren't.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV\u003c\/strong\u003e — UV-stabilised plastics, hot-dip galvanised metal, and pressure-treated timber all handle UK summer sun. Commodity equivalents fail visibly within 2–3 years.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWind\u003c\/strong\u003e — exposed gardens (hilltops, coastal locations, wide gardens with no windbreaks) need anchoring. Most products in this range include floor anchor points; use them.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDriving rain\u003c\/strong\u003e — sealed lid gaskets and overhung roof edges keep wind-driven rain out. Look for these features specifically if your site is exposed.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBase preparation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe single most-skipped step on outdoor storage installation. All sheds need a level, solid base. Three good options: concrete slab (gold standard, 25-year base), paving flags on hardcore (cheaper, perfectly fine for sheds up to 8×6 ft), or a pressure-treated timber base on bearers for slightly uneven ground. Don't put a shed directly on grass.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDon't put any storage unit directly on grass. The base will move; lid seals will fail; condensation underneath will accelerate component failure. Plan the base before ordering the product.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDelivery and assembly\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis product ships from our UK warehouse with free mainland delivery on orders over £100. Standard delivery is 5–7 working days, tracked. This product ships pallet-direct to your kerbside. The driver won't bring the pallet down a path, up steps, or inside. Plan for help moving it from the kerb — two people minimum, or a pallet truck for the very largest. You'll get a dispatch email with a tracking link; the courier will text or email a delivery window the day before.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAssembly is the bigger task in this category — 2-3 hours for sheds up to 6×4 ft with two people, longer for larger units. You'll want a screwdriver, a 10mm spanner, a level, and a step-ladder for the roof. Manufacturer-quoted times tend to be optimistic by 30-50% on first build. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/assembly\"\u003eassembly help page\u003c\/a\u003e for tools, time estimates, and where to book a Tasker if you'd rather not DIY.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eReturns and consumer protection\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEvery order is covered by your full UK consumer protections:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConsumer Rights Act 2015\u003c\/strong\u003e — the goods must be of satisfactory quality, fit for purpose, and as described. Your statutory rights apply automatically and never expire.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConsumer Contracts Regulations 2013\u003c\/strong\u003e — 14 days from receipt to change your mind, no reason needed. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/returns\"\u003ereturns page\u003c\/a\u003e for the process.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e30-day damaged-on-arrival guarantee\u003c\/strong\u003e — if anything's wrong on delivery, email us with photos and we'll arrange a free replacement or full refund including return postage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor order questions, delivery updates, or post-purchase support, email \u003ca href=\"mailto:hello@garden-storage.com\"\u003ehello@garden-storage.com\u003c\/a\u003e or call \u003ca href=\"tel:+447383567839\"\u003e+44 7383 567839\u003c\/a\u003e Mon–Fri 9am–5pm. We respond to email within one UK working day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCommon questions about sheds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDo I need planning permission?\u003c\/strong\u003e In England, sheds under 2.5m high covering less than 50% of garden area are usually permitted development. Conservation Areas, listed buildings and AONBs have stricter rules — check with your council.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat's covered by the warranty?\u003c\/strong\u003e Manufacturer-specific structural warranties apply (typically 5-10 years for plastic, 10-20 for metal galvanised). Your Consumer Rights Act 2015 protections apply on top — satisfactory quality, fit for purpose, as described — and never expire.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow does insurance work for stored contents?\u003c\/strong\u003e Most home contents policies cover items in outbuildings up to a stated limit (often £1,000-£3,000), with conditions about lock type and structure. Check your policy schedule before storing anything high-value.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor more on sheds, see our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/garden-storage-sheds\"\u003esheds buying guide\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Garden Storage","offers":[{"title":"Default","offer_id":57903895544153,"sku":"GSH-13X11FT-GREY-11","price":632.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1041\/5557\/8713\/files\/S5e85eec15a2c44e68944fb3e395a6dc0J.webp?v=1776959158"},{"product_id":"4x6-lockable-garden-shed-grey","title":"4x6 Lockable Garden Shed — Grey","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eA galvanised steel shed with a powder-coat finish — tidy, honest storage for tools, mowers and garden kit.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBuilt from 0.4mm galvanised steel with a powder-coat finish on top of the zinc layer. That's two barriers between the steel and the weather, which is why the panels don't rust-bloom at the cut edges the way budget alternatives do. Pre-drilled panels and clearly numbered parts keep the flat-pack assembly predictable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe door has a reinforced frame and a pre-fitted hasp so you can add your own Sold Secure padlock (sold separately). Integrated gable vents stop condensation building up. The floor panels are rated for a walk-behind mower, a mid-size BBQ or a pair of adult bikes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat's included\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e1 × 4×6ft garden shed (flat-packed)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eReinforced floor panel and fixings\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eLockable door with reinforced frame\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eGable vent(s)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eNumbered panels, hardware pack and printed instructions\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDesigned for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eHand tools, a walk-behind mower and garden-power kit\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eBike and tool combined storage where floor space is tight\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003ePotting, hobby or general outdoor workshop space\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eLocked storage for valuable tools or bikes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCare \u0026amp; maintenance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWipe clean with a damp cloth. Check bolts once a year, and touch up any exposed steel with enamel paint if a knock breaks the powder-coat. Re-seal the base perimeter if standing water starts to show.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"seo-content\"\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhere this fits in the range\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 4x6 Lockable Garden Shed — Grey is from our plastic shed collection. The decisions you make at purchase — material, size, base preparation, security — determine whether you'll thank yourself in 10 years' time or be replacing the unit halfway through.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePlastic and resin construction — what UV-stabilised resin buys you\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlastic garden storage covers a wide quality range. The cheap end is commodity HDPE engineered for two summers; the 4x6 Lockable Garden Shed — Grey sits at the other end — UV-stabilised resin engineered for ten or more.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe differences that determine lifetime:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV stabilisation\u003c\/strong\u003e — additives in the polymer formulation that resist breakdown from sunlight. Without these, plastic goes chalky in 18 months and brittle in 3–4 years. Stabilised plastic stays flexible and structurally sound for a decade or more.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWall thickness\u003c\/strong\u003e — quality resin units use 4mm+ walls, visible at the lid lip. Cheap commodity plastic is 2–3mm and flexes when leaned on.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFrost rating\u003c\/strong\u003e — stabilised resin handles -20°C without cracking. Commodity HDPE goes brittle at -5°C and cracks under impact.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSealed joinery\u003c\/strong\u003e — corner joints and lid gaskets that keep water out. The mark of an engineered product, not a moulded plastic shell.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe differences are usually invisible at the marketing level — manufacturers don't volunteer \"we use cheap plastic\" — but they show up unmistakably after the first 18 months in a UK garden.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSizing and what fits\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe exact dimensions and capacity for this product are in the specifications above. As a general guide for our sheds range:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFootprint\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWhat fits\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4×3 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMower + basic tools\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6×4 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMower, strimmer, hand tools, 1 bike\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8×6 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 bikes, tools, BBQ, garden chairs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10×8 ft+\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorkshop space + storage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInternal dimensions are what matter for fit; external dimensions matter for placement clearance. Quoted capacity is brim-full; usable capacity is roughly 70-80% of that, since you can't pack to the lid and expect to retrieve bottom items.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eUK weather considerations\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBritish gardens see 1,000-1,200mm of annual rainfall, frost cycling between -5°C and +10°C through winter, and summer UV exposure that damages unstabilised materials. The 4x6 Lockable Garden Shed — Grey is engineered against those specific conditions. Practical implications:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFrost\u003c\/strong\u003e — products in this range are rated for sustained sub-zero temperatures without cracking. The cheap alternatives aren't.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV\u003c\/strong\u003e — UV-stabilised plastics, hot-dip galvanised metal, and pressure-treated timber all handle UK summer sun. Commodity equivalents fail visibly within 2–3 years.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWind\u003c\/strong\u003e — exposed gardens (hilltops, coastal locations, wide gardens with no windbreaks) need anchoring. Most products in this range include floor anchor points; use them.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDriving rain\u003c\/strong\u003e — sealed lid gaskets and overhung roof edges keep wind-driven rain out. Look for these features specifically if your site is exposed.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBase preparation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe single most-skipped step on outdoor storage installation. All sheds need a level, solid base. Three good options: concrete slab (gold standard, 25-year base), paving flags on hardcore (cheaper, perfectly fine for sheds up to 8×6 ft), or a pressure-treated timber base on bearers for slightly uneven ground. Don't put a shed directly on grass.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDon't put any storage unit directly on grass. The base will move; lid seals will fail; condensation underneath will accelerate component failure. Plan the base before ordering the product.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDelivery and assembly\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis product ships from our UK warehouse with free mainland delivery on orders over £100. Standard delivery is 5–7 working days, tracked. This product ships pallet-direct to your kerbside. The driver won't bring the pallet down a path, up steps, or inside. Plan for help moving it from the kerb — two people minimum, or a pallet truck for the very largest. You'll get a dispatch email with a tracking link; the courier will text or email a delivery window the day before.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAssembly is the bigger task in this category — 2-3 hours for sheds up to 6×4 ft with two people, longer for larger units. You'll want a screwdriver, a 10mm spanner, a level, and a step-ladder for the roof. Manufacturer-quoted times tend to be optimistic by 30-50% on first build. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/assembly\"\u003eassembly help page\u003c\/a\u003e for tools, time estimates, and where to book a Tasker if you'd rather not DIY.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eReturns and consumer protection\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEvery order is covered by your full UK consumer protections:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConsumer Rights Act 2015\u003c\/strong\u003e — the goods must be of satisfactory quality, fit for purpose, and as described. Your statutory rights apply automatically and never expire.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConsumer Contracts Regulations 2013\u003c\/strong\u003e — 14 days from receipt to change your mind, no reason needed. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/returns\"\u003ereturns page\u003c\/a\u003e for the process.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e30-day damaged-on-arrival guarantee\u003c\/strong\u003e — if anything's wrong on delivery, email us with photos and we'll arrange a free replacement or full refund including return postage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor order questions, delivery updates, or post-purchase support, email \u003ca href=\"mailto:hello@garden-storage.com\"\u003ehello@garden-storage.com\u003c\/a\u003e or call \u003ca href=\"tel:+447383567839\"\u003e+44 7383 567839\u003c\/a\u003e Mon–Fri 9am–5pm. We respond to email within one UK working day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCommon questions about sheds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDo I need planning permission?\u003c\/strong\u003e In England, sheds under 2.5m high covering less than 50% of garden area are usually permitted development. Conservation Areas, listed buildings and AONBs have stricter rules — check with your council.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat's covered by the warranty?\u003c\/strong\u003e Manufacturer-specific structural warranties apply (typically 5-10 years for plastic, 10-20 for metal galvanised). Your Consumer Rights Act 2015 protections apply on top — satisfactory quality, fit for purpose, as described — and never expire.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow does insurance work for stored contents?\u003c\/strong\u003e Most home contents policies cover items in outbuildings up to a stated limit (often £1,000-£3,000), with conditions about lock type and structure. Check your policy schedule before storing anything high-value.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor more on sheds, see our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/garden-storage-sheds\"\u003esheds buying guide\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Garden Storage","offers":[{"title":"Grey","offer_id":57903895675225,"sku":"GSH-4X6FT-GREY-12","price":392.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1041\/5557\/8713\/files\/S3d822112ac16412e9b1bc15d1d46276dw.webp?v=1776959161"},{"product_id":"5x4-3-garden-shed-grey","title":"5x4.3 Garden Shed — Grey","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eA galvanised steel shed with a powder-coat finish — tidy, honest storage for tools, mowers and garden kit.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBuilt from 0.4mm galvanised steel with a powder-coat finish on top of the zinc layer. That's two barriers between the steel and the weather, which is why the panels don't rust-bloom at the cut edges the way budget alternatives do. Pre-drilled panels and clearly numbered parts keep the flat-pack assembly predictable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIntegrated gable vents stop condensation building up. The floor panels are rated for a walk-behind mower, a mid-size BBQ or a pair of adult bikes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat's included\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e \u003cli\u003e1 × 5×4.3ft garden shed (flat-packed)\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eReinforced floor panel and fixings\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eSpring-latch door with retrofit hasp\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eGable vent(s)\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eNumbered panels, hardware pack and printed instructions\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDesigned for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e \u003cli\u003eHand tools, a walk-behind mower and garden-power kit\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eBike and tool combined storage where floor space is tight\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003ePotting, hobby or general outdoor workshop space\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCare \u0026amp; maintenance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWipe clean with a damp cloth. Check bolts once a year, and touch up any exposed steel with enamel paint if a knock breaks the powder-coat. Re-seal the base perimeter if standing water starts to show.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"seo-content\"\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhere this fits in the range\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 5x4.3 Garden Shed — Grey is from our plastic shed collection. The decisions you make at purchase — material, size, base preparation, security — determine whether you'll thank yourself in 10 years' time or be replacing the unit halfway through.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePlastic and resin construction — what UV-stabilised resin buys you\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlastic garden storage covers a wide quality range. The cheap end is commodity HDPE engineered for two summers; the 5x4.3 Garden Shed — Grey sits at the other end — UV-stabilised resin engineered for ten or more.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe differences that determine lifetime:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV stabilisation\u003c\/strong\u003e — additives in the polymer formulation that resist breakdown from sunlight. Without these, plastic goes chalky in 18 months and brittle in 3–4 years. Stabilised plastic stays flexible and structurally sound for a decade or more.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWall thickness\u003c\/strong\u003e — quality resin units use 4mm+ walls, visible at the lid lip. Cheap commodity plastic is 2–3mm and flexes when leaned on.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFrost rating\u003c\/strong\u003e — stabilised resin handles -20°C without cracking. Commodity HDPE goes brittle at -5°C and cracks under impact.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSealed joinery\u003c\/strong\u003e — corner joints and lid gaskets that keep water out. The mark of an engineered product, not a moulded plastic shell.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe differences are usually invisible at the marketing level — manufacturers don't volunteer \"we use cheap plastic\" — but they show up unmistakably after the first 18 months in a UK garden.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSizing and what fits\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe exact dimensions and capacity for this product are in the specifications above. As a general guide for our sheds range:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFootprint\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWhat fits\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4×3 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMower + basic tools\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6×4 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMower, strimmer, hand tools, 1 bike\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8×6 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 bikes, tools, BBQ, garden chairs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10×8 ft+\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorkshop space + storage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInternal dimensions are what matter for fit; external dimensions matter for placement clearance. Quoted capacity is brim-full; usable capacity is roughly 70-80% of that, since you can't pack to the lid and expect to retrieve bottom items.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eUK weather considerations\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBritish gardens see 1,000-1,200mm of annual rainfall, frost cycling between -5°C and +10°C through winter, and summer UV exposure that damages unstabilised materials. The 5x4.3 Garden Shed — Grey is engineered against those specific conditions. Practical implications:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFrost\u003c\/strong\u003e — products in this range are rated for sustained sub-zero temperatures without cracking. The cheap alternatives aren't.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV\u003c\/strong\u003e — UV-stabilised plastics, hot-dip galvanised metal, and pressure-treated timber all handle UK summer sun. Commodity equivalents fail visibly within 2–3 years.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWind\u003c\/strong\u003e — exposed gardens (hilltops, coastal locations, wide gardens with no windbreaks) need anchoring. Most products in this range include floor anchor points; use them.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDriving rain\u003c\/strong\u003e — sealed lid gaskets and overhung roof edges keep wind-driven rain out. Look for these features specifically if your site is exposed.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBase preparation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe single most-skipped step on outdoor storage installation. All sheds need a level, solid base. Three good options: concrete slab (gold standard, 25-year base), paving flags on hardcore (cheaper, perfectly fine for sheds up to 8×6 ft), or a pressure-treated timber base on bearers for slightly uneven ground. Don't put a shed directly on grass.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDon't put any storage unit directly on grass. The base will move; lid seals will fail; condensation underneath will accelerate component failure. Plan the base before ordering the product.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDelivery and assembly\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis product ships from our UK warehouse with free mainland delivery on orders over £100. Standard delivery is 5–7 working days, tracked. This product ships pallet-direct to your kerbside. The driver won't bring the pallet down a path, up steps, or inside. Plan for help moving it from the kerb — two people minimum, or a pallet truck for the very largest. You'll get a dispatch email with a tracking link; the courier will text or email a delivery window the day before.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAssembly is the bigger task in this category — 2-3 hours for sheds up to 6×4 ft with two people, longer for larger units. You'll want a screwdriver, a 10mm spanner, a level, and a step-ladder for the roof. Manufacturer-quoted times tend to be optimistic by 30-50% on first build. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/assembly\"\u003eassembly help page\u003c\/a\u003e for tools, time estimates, and where to book a Tasker if you'd rather not DIY.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eReturns and consumer protection\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEvery order is covered by your full UK consumer protections:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConsumer Rights Act 2015\u003c\/strong\u003e — the goods must be of satisfactory quality, fit for purpose, and as described. Your statutory rights apply automatically and never expire.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConsumer Contracts Regulations 2013\u003c\/strong\u003e — 14 days from receipt to change your mind, no reason needed. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/returns\"\u003ereturns page\u003c\/a\u003e for the process.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e30-day damaged-on-arrival guarantee\u003c\/strong\u003e — if anything's wrong on delivery, email us with photos and we'll arrange a free replacement or full refund including return postage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor order questions, delivery updates, or post-purchase support, email \u003ca href=\"mailto:hello@garden-storage.com\"\u003ehello@garden-storage.com\u003c\/a\u003e or call \u003ca href=\"tel:+447383567839\"\u003e+44 7383 567839\u003c\/a\u003e Mon–Fri 9am–5pm. We respond to email within one UK working day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCommon questions about sheds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDo I need planning permission?\u003c\/strong\u003e In England, sheds under 2.5m high covering less than 50% of garden area are usually permitted development. Conservation Areas, listed buildings and AONBs have stricter rules — check with your council.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat's covered by the warranty?\u003c\/strong\u003e Manufacturer-specific structural warranties apply (typically 5-10 years for plastic, 10-20 for metal galvanised). Your Consumer Rights Act 2015 protections apply on top — satisfactory quality, fit for purpose, as described — and never expire.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow does insurance work for stored contents?\u003c\/strong\u003e Most home contents policies cover items in outbuildings up to a stated limit (often £1,000-£3,000), with conditions about lock type and structure. Check your policy schedule before storing anything high-value.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor more on sheds, see our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/garden-storage-sheds\"\u003esheds buying guide\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Garden Storage","offers":[{"title":"Grey","offer_id":57903895839065,"sku":"GSH-5X4p3FT-GREY-13","price":321.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1041\/5557\/8713\/files\/S6d1b3453b87c49bf8a5d334a96135e3cs.webp?v=1776959163"},{"product_id":"5x3-waterproof-garden-shed-grey","title":"5x3 Waterproof Garden Shed — Grey","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eA UV-stabilised resin shed that shrugs off rain, doesn't rot and never needs repainting.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMoulded from UV-stabilised resin — the same material we use across our waterproof range, chosen because it doesn't rot, doesn't fade and never needs re-staining. Panels are thicker than most at this price point and joints are sealed rather than painted over, so water genuinely can't creep in.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe door has a reinforced frame and a pre-fitted hasp so you can add your own Sold Secure padlock (sold separately). Integrated gable vents stop condensation building up. Sealed joints and drainage channels at the base keep the inside dry even in sustained rain. The floor panels are rated for a walk-behind mower, a mid-size BBQ or a pair of adult bikes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat's included\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e1 × 5×3ft garden shed (flat-packed)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eReinforced floor panel and fixings\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eLockable door with reinforced frame\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eGable vent(s)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eNumbered panels, hardware pack and printed instructions\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDesigned for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eHand tools, a walk-behind mower and garden-power kit\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eBike and tool combined storage where floor space is tight\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003ePotting, hobby or general outdoor workshop space\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eLocked storage for valuable tools or bikes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCare \u0026amp; maintenance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWipe clean with a damp cloth and mild detergent. No annual re-treatment needed; the resin is UV-stabilised so colour fade is minimal. Avoid solvents and power-washing at close range.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"seo-content\"\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat this means for your garden\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 5x3 Waterproof Garden Shed — Grey is one of our plastic sheds, sized and engineered for typical UK garden use. A shed is the kind of purchase you make once and keep for a decade — or twice in five years if you buy badly. The notes below explain the full lifecycle picture and where this product sits within it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePlastic and resin construction — what UV-stabilised resin buys you\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlastic garden storage covers a wide quality range. The cheap end is commodity HDPE engineered for two summers; the 5x3 Waterproof Garden Shed — Grey sits at the other end — UV-stabilised resin engineered for ten or more.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe differences that determine lifetime:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV stabilisation\u003c\/strong\u003e — additives in the polymer formulation that resist breakdown from sunlight. Without these, plastic goes chalky in 18 months and brittle in 3–4 years. Stabilised plastic stays flexible and structurally sound for a decade or more.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWall thickness\u003c\/strong\u003e — quality resin units use 4mm+ walls, visible at the lid lip. Cheap commodity plastic is 2–3mm and flexes when leaned on.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFrost rating\u003c\/strong\u003e — stabilised resin handles -20°C without cracking. Commodity HDPE goes brittle at -5°C and cracks under impact.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSealed joinery\u003c\/strong\u003e — corner joints and lid gaskets that keep water out. The mark of an engineered product, not a moulded plastic shell.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe differences are usually invisible at the marketing level — manufacturers don't volunteer \"we use cheap plastic\" — but they show up unmistakably after the first 18 months in a UK garden.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSizing and what fits\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe exact dimensions and capacity for this product are in the specifications above. As a general guide for our sheds range:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFootprint\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWhat fits\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4×3 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMower + basic tools\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6×4 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMower, strimmer, hand tools, 1 bike\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8×6 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 bikes, tools, BBQ, garden chairs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10×8 ft+\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorkshop space + storage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInternal dimensions are what matter for fit; external dimensions matter for placement clearance. Quoted capacity is brim-full; usable capacity is roughly 70-80% of that, since you can't pack to the lid and expect to retrieve bottom items.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eUK weather considerations\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBritish gardens see 1,000-1,200mm of annual rainfall, frost cycling between -5°C and +10°C through winter, and summer UV exposure that damages unstabilised materials. The 5x3 Waterproof Garden Shed — Grey is engineered against those specific conditions. Practical implications:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFrost\u003c\/strong\u003e — products in this range are rated for sustained sub-zero temperatures without cracking. The cheap alternatives aren't.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV\u003c\/strong\u003e — UV-stabilised plastics, hot-dip galvanised metal, and pressure-treated timber all handle UK summer sun. Commodity equivalents fail visibly within 2–3 years.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWind\u003c\/strong\u003e — exposed gardens (hilltops, coastal locations, wide gardens with no windbreaks) need anchoring. Most products in this range include floor anchor points; use them.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDriving rain\u003c\/strong\u003e — sealed lid gaskets and overhung roof edges keep wind-driven rain out. Look for these features specifically if your site is exposed.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBase preparation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe single most-skipped step on outdoor storage installation. All sheds need a level, solid base. Three good options: concrete slab (gold standard, 25-year base), paving flags on hardcore (cheaper, perfectly fine for sheds up to 8×6 ft), or a pressure-treated timber base on bearers for slightly uneven ground. Don't put a shed directly on grass.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDon't put any storage unit directly on grass. The base will move; lid seals will fail; condensation underneath will accelerate component failure. Plan the base before ordering the product.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDelivery and assembly\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis product ships from our UK warehouse with free mainland delivery on orders over £100. Standard delivery is 5–7 working days, tracked. This product ships pallet-direct to your kerbside. The driver won't bring the pallet down a path, up steps, or inside. Plan for help moving it from the kerb — two people minimum, or a pallet truck for the very largest. You'll get a dispatch email with a tracking link; the courier will text or email a delivery window the day before.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAssembly is the bigger task in this category — 2-3 hours for sheds up to 6×4 ft with two people, longer for larger units. You'll want a screwdriver, a 10mm spanner, a level, and a step-ladder for the roof. Manufacturer-quoted times tend to be optimistic by 30-50% on first build. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/assembly\"\u003eassembly help page\u003c\/a\u003e for tools, time estimates, and where to book a Tasker if you'd rather not DIY.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eReturns and consumer protection\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEvery order is covered by your full UK consumer protections:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConsumer Rights Act 2015\u003c\/strong\u003e — the goods must be of satisfactory quality, fit for purpose, and as described. Your statutory rights apply automatically and never expire.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConsumer Contracts Regulations 2013\u003c\/strong\u003e — 14 days from receipt to change your mind, no reason needed. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/returns\"\u003ereturns page\u003c\/a\u003e for the process.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e30-day damaged-on-arrival guarantee\u003c\/strong\u003e — if anything's wrong on delivery, email us with photos and we'll arrange a free replacement or full refund including return postage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor order questions, delivery updates, or post-purchase support, email \u003ca href=\"mailto:hello@garden-storage.com\"\u003ehello@garden-storage.com\u003c\/a\u003e or call \u003ca href=\"tel:+447383567839\"\u003e+44 7383 567839\u003c\/a\u003e Mon–Fri 9am–5pm. We respond to email within one UK working day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCommon questions about sheds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDo I need planning permission?\u003c\/strong\u003e In England, sheds under 2.5m high covering less than 50% of garden area are usually permitted development. Conservation Areas, listed buildings and AONBs have stricter rules — check with your council.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat's covered by the warranty?\u003c\/strong\u003e Manufacturer-specific structural warranties apply (typically 5-10 years for plastic, 10-20 for metal galvanised). Your Consumer Rights Act 2015 protections apply on top — satisfactory quality, fit for purpose, as described — and never expire.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow does insurance work for stored contents?\u003c\/strong\u003e Most home contents policies cover items in outbuildings up to a stated limit (often £1,000-£3,000), with conditions about lock type and structure. Check your policy schedule before storing anything high-value.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor more on sheds, see our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/garden-storage-sheds\"\u003esheds buying guide\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Garden Storage","offers":[{"title":"Default","offer_id":57903896035673,"sku":"GSH-5X3FT-GREY-14","price":358.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1041\/5557\/8713\/files\/S2aef9fc2a02d41dba7f81805a06056c8P.webp?v=1776959165"},{"product_id":"9x4-lockable-garden-shed-grey","title":"9x4 Lockable Garden Shed — Grey","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eA galvanised steel shed with a powder-coat finish — tidy, honest storage for tools, mowers and garden kit.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBuilt from 0.4mm galvanised steel with a powder-coat finish on top of the zinc layer. That's two barriers between the steel and the weather, which is why the panels don't rust-bloom at the cut edges the way budget alternatives do. Pre-drilled panels and clearly numbered parts keep the flat-pack assembly predictable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe door has a reinforced frame and a pre-fitted hasp so you can add your own Sold Secure padlock (sold separately). Integrated gable vents stop condensation building up. The floor panels are rated for a walk-behind mower, a mid-size BBQ or a pair of adult bikes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat's included\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e1 × 9×4ft garden shed (flat-packed)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eReinforced floor panel and fixings\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eLockable door with reinforced frame\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eGable vent(s)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eNumbered panels, hardware pack and printed instructions\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDesigned for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eHand tools, a walk-behind mower and garden-power kit\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eBike and tool combined storage where floor space is tight\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003ePotting, hobby or general outdoor workshop space\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eLocked storage for valuable tools or bikes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCare \u0026amp; maintenance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWipe clean with a damp cloth. Check bolts once a year, and touch up any exposed steel with enamel paint if a knock breaks the powder-coat. Re-seal the base perimeter if standing water starts to show.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"seo-content\"\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eThe bigger picture\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBuying a garden shed is one of those decisions you live with for years. 9x4 Lockable Garden Shed — Grey sits in our plastic category, which has specific characteristics worth understanding before purchase. The product specs above tell you what; the section below tells you why those specs matter and what to expect over the unit's lifetime.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePlastic and resin construction — what UV-stabilised resin buys you\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlastic garden storage covers a wide quality range. The cheap end is commodity HDPE engineered for two summers; the 9x4 Lockable Garden Shed — Grey sits at the other end — UV-stabilised resin engineered for ten or more.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe differences that determine lifetime:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV stabilisation\u003c\/strong\u003e — additives in the polymer formulation that resist breakdown from sunlight. Without these, plastic goes chalky in 18 months and brittle in 3–4 years. Stabilised plastic stays flexible and structurally sound for a decade or more.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWall thickness\u003c\/strong\u003e — quality resin units use 4mm+ walls, visible at the lid lip. Cheap commodity plastic is 2–3mm and flexes when leaned on.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFrost rating\u003c\/strong\u003e — stabilised resin handles -20°C without cracking. Commodity HDPE goes brittle at -5°C and cracks under impact.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSealed joinery\u003c\/strong\u003e — corner joints and lid gaskets that keep water out. The mark of an engineered product, not a moulded plastic shell.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe differences are usually invisible at the marketing level — manufacturers don't volunteer \"we use cheap plastic\" — but they show up unmistakably after the first 18 months in a UK garden.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSizing and what fits\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe exact dimensions and capacity for this product are in the specifications above. As a general guide for our sheds range:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFootprint\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWhat fits\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4×3 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMower + basic tools\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6×4 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMower, strimmer, hand tools, 1 bike\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8×6 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 bikes, tools, BBQ, garden chairs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10×8 ft+\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorkshop space + storage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInternal dimensions are what matter for fit; external dimensions matter for placement clearance. Quoted capacity is brim-full; usable capacity is roughly 70-80% of that, since you can't pack to the lid and expect to retrieve bottom items.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eUK weather considerations\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBritish gardens see 1,000-1,200mm of annual rainfall, frost cycling between -5°C and +10°C through winter, and summer UV exposure that damages unstabilised materials. The 9x4 Lockable Garden Shed — Grey is engineered against those specific conditions. Practical implications:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFrost\u003c\/strong\u003e — products in this range are rated for sustained sub-zero temperatures without cracking. The cheap alternatives aren't.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV\u003c\/strong\u003e — UV-stabilised plastics, hot-dip galvanised metal, and pressure-treated timber all handle UK summer sun. Commodity equivalents fail visibly within 2–3 years.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWind\u003c\/strong\u003e — exposed gardens (hilltops, coastal locations, wide gardens with no windbreaks) need anchoring. Most products in this range include floor anchor points; use them.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDriving rain\u003c\/strong\u003e — sealed lid gaskets and overhung roof edges keep wind-driven rain out. Look for these features specifically if your site is exposed.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBase preparation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe single most-skipped step on outdoor storage installation. All sheds need a level, solid base. Three good options: concrete slab (gold standard, 25-year base), paving flags on hardcore (cheaper, perfectly fine for sheds up to 8×6 ft), or a pressure-treated timber base on bearers for slightly uneven ground. Don't put a shed directly on grass.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDon't put any storage unit directly on grass. The base will move; lid seals will fail; condensation underneath will accelerate component failure. Plan the base before ordering the product.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDelivery and assembly\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis product ships from our UK warehouse with free mainland delivery on orders over £100. Standard delivery is 5–7 working days, tracked. This product ships pallet-direct to your kerbside. The driver won't bring the pallet down a path, up steps, or inside. Plan for help moving it from the kerb — two people minimum, or a pallet truck for the very largest. You'll get a dispatch email with a tracking link; the courier will text or email a delivery window the day before.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAssembly is the bigger task in this category — 2-3 hours for sheds up to 6×4 ft with two people, longer for larger units. You'll want a screwdriver, a 10mm spanner, a level, and a step-ladder for the roof. Manufacturer-quoted times tend to be optimistic by 30-50% on first build. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/assembly\"\u003eassembly help page\u003c\/a\u003e for tools, time estimates, and where to book a Tasker if you'd rather not DIY.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eReturns and consumer protection\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEvery order is covered by your full UK consumer protections:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConsumer Rights Act 2015\u003c\/strong\u003e — the goods must be of satisfactory quality, fit for purpose, and as described. Your statutory rights apply automatically and never expire.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConsumer Contracts Regulations 2013\u003c\/strong\u003e — 14 days from receipt to change your mind, no reason needed. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/returns\"\u003ereturns page\u003c\/a\u003e for the process.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e30-day damaged-on-arrival guarantee\u003c\/strong\u003e — if anything's wrong on delivery, email us with photos and we'll arrange a free replacement or full refund including return postage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor order questions, delivery updates, or post-purchase support, email \u003ca href=\"mailto:hello@garden-storage.com\"\u003ehello@garden-storage.com\u003c\/a\u003e or call \u003ca href=\"tel:+447383567839\"\u003e+44 7383 567839\u003c\/a\u003e Mon–Fri 9am–5pm. We respond to email within one UK working day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCommon questions about sheds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDo I need planning permission?\u003c\/strong\u003e In England, sheds under 2.5m high covering less than 50% of garden area are usually permitted development. Conservation Areas, listed buildings and AONBs have stricter rules — check with your council.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat's covered by the warranty?\u003c\/strong\u003e Manufacturer-specific structural warranties apply (typically 5-10 years for plastic, 10-20 for metal galvanised). Your Consumer Rights Act 2015 protections apply on top — satisfactory quality, fit for purpose, as described — and never expire.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow does insurance work for stored contents?\u003c\/strong\u003e Most home contents policies cover items in outbuildings up to a stated limit (often £1,000-£3,000), with conditions about lock type and structure. Check your policy schedule before storing anything high-value.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor more on sheds, see our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/garden-storage-sheds\"\u003esheds buying guide\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Garden Storage","offers":[{"title":"Grey","offer_id":57903896199513,"sku":"GSH-9X4FT-GREY-16","price":550.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1041\/5557\/8713\/files\/S26824880a6ab4fe59c6c7322ebab1c53J.webp?v=1776959169"},{"product_id":"3-3x3-4-lockable-garden-shed-grey","title":"3.3x3.4 Lockable Garden Shed — Grey","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eA galvanised steel shed with a powder-coat finish — tidy, honest storage for tools, mowers and garden kit.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBuilt from 0.4mm galvanised steel with a powder-coat finish on top of the zinc layer. That's two barriers between the steel and the weather, which is why the panels don't rust-bloom at the cut edges the way budget alternatives do. Pre-drilled panels and clearly numbered parts keep the flat-pack assembly predictable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe door has a reinforced frame and a pre-fitted hasp so you can add your own Sold Secure padlock (sold separately). The floor panels are rated for a walk-behind mower, a mid-size BBQ or a pair of adult bikes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat's included\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e1 × 3.3×3.4ft garden shed (flat-packed)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eReinforced floor panel and fixings\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eLockable door with reinforced frame\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eRidge detail for passive airflow\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eNumbered panels, hardware pack and printed instructions\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDesigned for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eHand tools, a walk-behind mower and garden-power kit\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eBike and tool combined storage where floor space is tight\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003ePotting, hobby or general outdoor workshop space\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eLocked storage for valuable tools or bikes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCare \u0026amp; maintenance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWipe clean with a damp cloth. Check bolts once a year, and touch up any exposed steel with enamel paint if a knock breaks the powder-coat. Re-seal the base perimeter if standing water starts to show.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"seo-content\"\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eThe bigger picture\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBuying a garden shed is one of those decisions you live with for years. 3.3x3.4 Lockable Garden Shed — Grey sits in our plastic category, which has specific characteristics worth understanding before purchase. The product specs above tell you what; the section below tells you why those specs matter and what to expect over the unit's lifetime.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePlastic and resin construction — what UV-stabilised resin buys you\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlastic garden storage covers a wide quality range. The cheap end is commodity HDPE engineered for two summers; the 3.3x3.4 Lockable Garden Shed — Grey sits at the other end — UV-stabilised resin engineered for ten or more.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe differences that determine lifetime:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV stabilisation\u003c\/strong\u003e — additives in the polymer formulation that resist breakdown from sunlight. Without these, plastic goes chalky in 18 months and brittle in 3–4 years. Stabilised plastic stays flexible and structurally sound for a decade or more.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWall thickness\u003c\/strong\u003e — quality resin units use 4mm+ walls, visible at the lid lip. Cheap commodity plastic is 2–3mm and flexes when leaned on.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFrost rating\u003c\/strong\u003e — stabilised resin handles -20°C without cracking. Commodity HDPE goes brittle at -5°C and cracks under impact.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSealed joinery\u003c\/strong\u003e — corner joints and lid gaskets that keep water out. The mark of an engineered product, not a moulded plastic shell.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe differences are usually invisible at the marketing level — manufacturers don't volunteer \"we use cheap plastic\" — but they show up unmistakably after the first 18 months in a UK garden.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSizing and what fits\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe exact dimensions and capacity for this product are in the specifications above. As a general guide for our sheds range:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFootprint\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWhat fits\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4×3 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMower + basic tools\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6×4 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMower, strimmer, hand tools, 1 bike\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8×6 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 bikes, tools, BBQ, garden chairs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10×8 ft+\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorkshop space + storage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInternal dimensions are what matter for fit; external dimensions matter for placement clearance. Quoted capacity is brim-full; usable capacity is roughly 70-80% of that, since you can't pack to the lid and expect to retrieve bottom items.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eUK weather considerations\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBritish gardens see 1,000-1,200mm of annual rainfall, frost cycling between -5°C and +10°C through winter, and summer UV exposure that damages unstabilised materials. The 3.3x3.4 Lockable Garden Shed — Grey is engineered against those specific conditions. Practical implications:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFrost\u003c\/strong\u003e — products in this range are rated for sustained sub-zero temperatures without cracking. The cheap alternatives aren't.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV\u003c\/strong\u003e — UV-stabilised plastics, hot-dip galvanised metal, and pressure-treated timber all handle UK summer sun. Commodity equivalents fail visibly within 2–3 years.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWind\u003c\/strong\u003e — exposed gardens (hilltops, coastal locations, wide gardens with no windbreaks) need anchoring. Most products in this range include floor anchor points; use them.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDriving rain\u003c\/strong\u003e — sealed lid gaskets and overhung roof edges keep wind-driven rain out. Look for these features specifically if your site is exposed.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBase preparation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe single most-skipped step on outdoor storage installation. All sheds need a level, solid base. Three good options: concrete slab (gold standard, 25-year base), paving flags on hardcore (cheaper, perfectly fine for sheds up to 8×6 ft), or a pressure-treated timber base on bearers for slightly uneven ground. Don't put a shed directly on grass.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDon't put any storage unit directly on grass. The base will move; lid seals will fail; condensation underneath will accelerate component failure. Plan the base before ordering the product.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDelivery and assembly\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis product ships from our UK warehouse with free mainland delivery on orders over £100. Standard delivery is 5–7 working days, tracked. This product ships pallet-direct to your kerbside. The driver won't bring the pallet down a path, up steps, or inside. Plan for help moving it from the kerb — two people minimum, or a pallet truck for the very largest. You'll get a dispatch email with a tracking link; the courier will text or email a delivery window the day before.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAssembly is the bigger task in this category — 2-3 hours for sheds up to 6×4 ft with two people, longer for larger units. You'll want a screwdriver, a 10mm spanner, a level, and a step-ladder for the roof. Manufacturer-quoted times tend to be optimistic by 30-50% on first build. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/assembly\"\u003eassembly help page\u003c\/a\u003e for tools, time estimates, and where to book a Tasker if you'd rather not DIY.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eReturns and consumer protection\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEvery order is covered by your full UK consumer protections:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConsumer Rights Act 2015\u003c\/strong\u003e — the goods must be of satisfactory quality, fit for purpose, and as described. Your statutory rights apply automatically and never expire.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConsumer Contracts Regulations 2013\u003c\/strong\u003e — 14 days from receipt to change your mind, no reason needed. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/returns\"\u003ereturns page\u003c\/a\u003e for the process.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e30-day damaged-on-arrival guarantee\u003c\/strong\u003e — if anything's wrong on delivery, email us with photos and we'll arrange a free replacement or full refund including return postage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor order questions, delivery updates, or post-purchase support, email \u003ca href=\"mailto:hello@garden-storage.com\"\u003ehello@garden-storage.com\u003c\/a\u003e or call \u003ca href=\"tel:+447383567839\"\u003e+44 7383 567839\u003c\/a\u003e Mon–Fri 9am–5pm. We respond to email within one UK working day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCommon questions about sheds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDo I need planning permission?\u003c\/strong\u003e In England, sheds under 2.5m high covering less than 50% of garden area are usually permitted development. Conservation Areas, listed buildings and AONBs have stricter rules — check with your council.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat's covered by the warranty?\u003c\/strong\u003e Manufacturer-specific structural warranties apply (typically 5-10 years for plastic, 10-20 for metal galvanised). Your Consumer Rights Act 2015 protections apply on top — satisfactory quality, fit for purpose, as described — and never expire.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow does insurance work for stored contents?\u003c\/strong\u003e Most home contents policies cover items in outbuildings up to a stated limit (often £1,000-£3,000), with conditions about lock type and structure. Check your policy schedule before storing anything high-value.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor more on sheds, see our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/garden-storage-sheds\"\u003esheds buying guide\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Garden Storage","offers":[{"title":"Grey","offer_id":57903896428889,"sku":"GSH-3p3X3p4FT-GREY-17","price":180.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1041\/5557\/8713\/files\/S207278ee718d464a9979b19374fb24f0q.webp?v=1776959171"},{"product_id":"5x9-garden-shed-grey","title":"5x9 Garden Shed — Grey","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eA pressure-treated FSC pine shed with tongue-and-groove cladding — real carpentry, not just screwed panels.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBuilt from FSC-certified pine, pressure-treated against rot and rebuffed with a smooth planed finish. The cladding is 12mm — thicker than the high-street budget kits — and the corners are rebated rather than simply butt-jointed, so the frame stays square once it's up. Re-treat every two to three years with a clear wood oil and it'll outlast most plastic alternatives.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe floor panels are rated for a walk-behind mower, a mid-size BBQ or a pair of adult bikes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat's included\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e \u003cli\u003e1 × 5×9ft garden shed (flat-packed)\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eReinforced floor panel and fixings\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eSpring-latch door with retrofit hasp\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eRidge detail for passive airflow\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eNumbered panels, hardware pack and printed instructions\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDesigned for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e \u003cli\u003eHand tools, a walk-behind mower and garden-power kit\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eBike and tool combined storage where floor space is tight\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003ePotting, hobby or general outdoor workshop space\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCare \u0026amp; maintenance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRe-treat every two to three years with a clear wood oil or decking stain — the pressure-treatment is the first line of defence, not the only one. Keep the base off saturated ground if you can, and wipe clean with a damp cloth as needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"seo-content\"\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat this means for your garden\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 5x9 Garden Shed — Grey is one of our plastic sheds, sized and engineered for typical UK garden use. A shed is the kind of purchase you make once and keep for a decade — or twice in five years if you buy badly. The notes below explain the full lifecycle picture and where this product sits within it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePlastic and resin construction — what UV-stabilised resin buys you\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlastic garden storage covers a wide quality range. The cheap end is commodity HDPE engineered for two summers; the 5x9 Garden Shed — Grey sits at the other end — UV-stabilised resin engineered for ten or more.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe differences that determine lifetime:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV stabilisation\u003c\/strong\u003e — additives in the polymer formulation that resist breakdown from sunlight. Without these, plastic goes chalky in 18 months and brittle in 3–4 years. Stabilised plastic stays flexible and structurally sound for a decade or more.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWall thickness\u003c\/strong\u003e — quality resin units use 4mm+ walls, visible at the lid lip. Cheap commodity plastic is 2–3mm and flexes when leaned on.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFrost rating\u003c\/strong\u003e — stabilised resin handles -20°C without cracking. Commodity HDPE goes brittle at -5°C and cracks under impact.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSealed joinery\u003c\/strong\u003e — corner joints and lid gaskets that keep water out. The mark of an engineered product, not a moulded plastic shell.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe differences are usually invisible at the marketing level — manufacturers don't volunteer \"we use cheap plastic\" — but they show up unmistakably after the first 18 months in a UK garden.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSizing and what fits\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe exact dimensions and capacity for this product are in the specifications above. As a general guide for our sheds range:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFootprint\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWhat fits\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4×3 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMower + basic tools\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6×4 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMower, strimmer, hand tools, 1 bike\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8×6 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 bikes, tools, BBQ, garden chairs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10×8 ft+\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorkshop space + storage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInternal dimensions are what matter for fit; external dimensions matter for placement clearance. Quoted capacity is brim-full; usable capacity is roughly 70-80% of that, since you can't pack to the lid and expect to retrieve bottom items.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eUK weather considerations\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBritish gardens see 1,000-1,200mm of annual rainfall, frost cycling between -5°C and +10°C through winter, and summer UV exposure that damages unstabilised materials. The 5x9 Garden Shed — Grey is engineered against those specific conditions. Practical implications:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFrost\u003c\/strong\u003e — products in this range are rated for sustained sub-zero temperatures without cracking. The cheap alternatives aren't.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV\u003c\/strong\u003e — UV-stabilised plastics, hot-dip galvanised metal, and pressure-treated timber all handle UK summer sun. Commodity equivalents fail visibly within 2–3 years.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWind\u003c\/strong\u003e — exposed gardens (hilltops, coastal locations, wide gardens with no windbreaks) need anchoring. Most products in this range include floor anchor points; use them.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDriving rain\u003c\/strong\u003e — sealed lid gaskets and overhung roof edges keep wind-driven rain out. Look for these features specifically if your site is exposed.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBase preparation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe single most-skipped step on outdoor storage installation. All sheds need a level, solid base. Three good options: concrete slab (gold standard, 25-year base), paving flags on hardcore (cheaper, perfectly fine for sheds up to 8×6 ft), or a pressure-treated timber base on bearers for slightly uneven ground. Don't put a shed directly on grass.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDon't put any storage unit directly on grass. The base will move; lid seals will fail; condensation underneath will accelerate component failure. Plan the base before ordering the product.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDelivery and assembly\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis product ships from our UK warehouse with free mainland delivery on orders over £100. Standard delivery is 5–7 working days, tracked. This product ships pallet-direct to your kerbside. The driver won't bring the pallet down a path, up steps, or inside. Plan for help moving it from the kerb — two people minimum, or a pallet truck for the very largest. You'll get a dispatch email with a tracking link; the courier will text or email a delivery window the day before.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAssembly is the bigger task in this category — 2-3 hours for sheds up to 6×4 ft with two people, longer for larger units. You'll want a screwdriver, a 10mm spanner, a level, and a step-ladder for the roof. Manufacturer-quoted times tend to be optimistic by 30-50% on first build. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/assembly\"\u003eassembly help page\u003c\/a\u003e for tools, time estimates, and where to book a Tasker if you'd rather not DIY.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eReturns and consumer protection\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEvery order is covered by your full UK consumer protections:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConsumer Rights Act 2015\u003c\/strong\u003e — the goods must be of satisfactory quality, fit for purpose, and as described. Your statutory rights apply automatically and never expire.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConsumer Contracts Regulations 2013\u003c\/strong\u003e — 14 days from receipt to change your mind, no reason needed. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/returns\"\u003ereturns page\u003c\/a\u003e for the process.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e30-day damaged-on-arrival guarantee\u003c\/strong\u003e — if anything's wrong on delivery, email us with photos and we'll arrange a free replacement or full refund including return postage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor order questions, delivery updates, or post-purchase support, email \u003ca href=\"mailto:hello@garden-storage.com\"\u003ehello@garden-storage.com\u003c\/a\u003e or call \u003ca href=\"tel:+447383567839\"\u003e+44 7383 567839\u003c\/a\u003e Mon–Fri 9am–5pm. We respond to email within one UK working day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCommon questions about sheds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDo I need planning permission?\u003c\/strong\u003e In England, sheds under 2.5m high covering less than 50% of garden area are usually permitted development. Conservation Areas, listed buildings and AONBs have stricter rules — check with your council.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat's covered by the warranty?\u003c\/strong\u003e Manufacturer-specific structural warranties apply (typically 5-10 years for plastic, 10-20 for metal galvanised). Your Consumer Rights Act 2015 protections apply on top — satisfactory quality, fit for purpose, as described — and never expire.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow does insurance work for stored contents?\u003c\/strong\u003e Most home contents policies cover items in outbuildings up to a stated limit (often £1,000-£3,000), with conditions about lock type and structure. Check your policy schedule before storing anything high-value.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor more on sheds, see our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/garden-storage-sheds\"\u003esheds buying guide\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Garden Storage","offers":[{"title":"Default","offer_id":57903896461657,"sku":"GSH-5X9FT-GREY-18","price":529.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1041\/5557\/8713\/files\/S612cac7a2a0b44589cd0d67e7e41ccfaz.webp?v=1776959174"},{"product_id":"waterproof-garden-shed-grey","title":"9×5 Waterproof Garden Shed — Grey","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eA galvanised steel shed with sealed joints and drainage channels — dry storage through every British season.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBuilt from 0.4mm galvanised steel with a powder-coat finish on top of the zinc layer. That's two barriers between the steel and the weather, which is why the panels don't rust-bloom at the cut edges the way budget alternatives do. Pre-drilled panels and clearly numbered parts keep the flat-pack assembly predictable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe door has a reinforced frame and a pre-fitted hasp so you can add your own Sold Secure padlock (sold separately). Sealed joints and drainage channels at the base keep the inside dry even in sustained rain. The floor panels are rated for a walk-behind mower, a mid-size BBQ or a pair of adult bikes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat's included\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e1 × garden shed (flat-packed)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eFoundation brackets (no floor — see care notes)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eLockable door with reinforced frame\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eRidge detail for passive airflow\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eNumbered panels, hardware pack and printed instructions\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDesigned for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eHand tools, a walk-behind mower and garden-power kit\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eBike and tool combined storage where floor space is tight\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003ePotting, hobby or general outdoor workshop space\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eLocked storage for valuable tools or bikes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCare \u0026amp; maintenance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWipe clean with a damp cloth. Check bolts once a year, and touch up any exposed steel with enamel paint if a knock breaks the powder-coat. Re-seal the base perimeter if standing water starts to show.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"seo-content\"\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhere this fits in the range\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 9×5 Waterproof Garden Shed — Grey is from our plastic shed collection. The decisions you make at purchase — material, size, base preparation, security — determine whether you'll thank yourself in 10 years' time or be replacing the unit halfway through.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePlastic and resin construction — what UV-stabilised resin buys you\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlastic garden storage covers a wide quality range. The cheap end is commodity HDPE engineered for two summers; the 9×5 Waterproof Garden Shed — Grey sits at the other end — UV-stabilised resin engineered for ten or more.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe differences that determine lifetime:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV stabilisation\u003c\/strong\u003e — additives in the polymer formulation that resist breakdown from sunlight. Without these, plastic goes chalky in 18 months and brittle in 3–4 years. Stabilised plastic stays flexible and structurally sound for a decade or more.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWall thickness\u003c\/strong\u003e — quality resin units use 4mm+ walls, visible at the lid lip. Cheap commodity plastic is 2–3mm and flexes when leaned on.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFrost rating\u003c\/strong\u003e — stabilised resin handles -20°C without cracking. Commodity HDPE goes brittle at -5°C and cracks under impact.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSealed joinery\u003c\/strong\u003e — corner joints and lid gaskets that keep water out. The mark of an engineered product, not a moulded plastic shell.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe differences are usually invisible at the marketing level — manufacturers don't volunteer \"we use cheap plastic\" — but they show up unmistakably after the first 18 months in a UK garden.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSizing and what fits\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe exact dimensions and capacity for this product are in the specifications above. As a general guide for our sheds range:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFootprint\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWhat fits\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4×3 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMower + basic tools\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6×4 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMower, strimmer, hand tools, 1 bike\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8×6 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 bikes, tools, BBQ, garden chairs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10×8 ft+\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorkshop space + storage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInternal dimensions are what matter for fit; external dimensions matter for placement clearance. Quoted capacity is brim-full; usable capacity is roughly 70-80% of that, since you can't pack to the lid and expect to retrieve bottom items.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eUK weather considerations\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBritish gardens see 1,000-1,200mm of annual rainfall, frost cycling between -5°C and +10°C through winter, and summer UV exposure that damages unstabilised materials. The 9×5 Waterproof Garden Shed — Grey is engineered against those specific conditions. Practical implications:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFrost\u003c\/strong\u003e — products in this range are rated for sustained sub-zero temperatures without cracking. The cheap alternatives aren't.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV\u003c\/strong\u003e — UV-stabilised plastics, hot-dip galvanised metal, and pressure-treated timber all handle UK summer sun. Commodity equivalents fail visibly within 2–3 years.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWind\u003c\/strong\u003e — exposed gardens (hilltops, coastal locations, wide gardens with no windbreaks) need anchoring. Most products in this range include floor anchor points; use them.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDriving rain\u003c\/strong\u003e — sealed lid gaskets and overhung roof edges keep wind-driven rain out. Look for these features specifically if your site is exposed.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBase preparation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe single most-skipped step on outdoor storage installation. All sheds need a level, solid base. Three good options: concrete slab (gold standard, 25-year base), paving flags on hardcore (cheaper, perfectly fine for sheds up to 8×6 ft), or a pressure-treated timber base on bearers for slightly uneven ground. Don't put a shed directly on grass.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDon't put any storage unit directly on grass. The base will move; lid seals will fail; condensation underneath will accelerate component failure. Plan the base before ordering the product.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDelivery and assembly\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis product ships from our UK warehouse with free mainland delivery on orders over £100. Standard delivery is 5–7 working days, tracked. This product ships pallet-direct to your kerbside. The driver won't bring the pallet down a path, up steps, or inside. Plan for help moving it from the kerb — two people minimum, or a pallet truck for the very largest. You'll get a dispatch email with a tracking link; the courier will text or email a delivery window the day before.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAssembly is the bigger task in this category — 2-3 hours for sheds up to 6×4 ft with two people, longer for larger units. You'll want a screwdriver, a 10mm spanner, a level, and a step-ladder for the roof. Manufacturer-quoted times tend to be optimistic by 30-50% on first build. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/assembly\"\u003eassembly help page\u003c\/a\u003e for tools, time estimates, and where to book a Tasker if you'd rather not DIY.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eReturns and consumer protection\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEvery order is covered by your full UK consumer protections:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConsumer Rights Act 2015\u003c\/strong\u003e — the goods must be of satisfactory quality, fit for purpose, and as described. Your statutory rights apply automatically and never expire.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConsumer Contracts Regulations 2013\u003c\/strong\u003e — 14 days from receipt to change your mind, no reason needed. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/returns\"\u003ereturns page\u003c\/a\u003e for the process.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e30-day damaged-on-arrival guarantee\u003c\/strong\u003e — if anything's wrong on delivery, email us with photos and we'll arrange a free replacement or full refund including return postage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor order questions, delivery updates, or post-purchase support, email \u003ca href=\"mailto:hello@garden-storage.com\"\u003ehello@garden-storage.com\u003c\/a\u003e or call \u003ca href=\"tel:+447383567839\"\u003e+44 7383 567839\u003c\/a\u003e Mon–Fri 9am–5pm. We respond to email within one UK working day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCommon questions about sheds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDo I need planning permission?\u003c\/strong\u003e In England, sheds under 2.5m high covering less than 50% of garden area are usually permitted development. Conservation Areas, listed buildings and AONBs have stricter rules — check with your council.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat's covered by the warranty?\u003c\/strong\u003e Manufacturer-specific structural warranties apply (typically 5-10 years for plastic, 10-20 for metal galvanised). Your Consumer Rights Act 2015 protections apply on top — satisfactory quality, fit for purpose, as described — and never expire.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow does insurance work for stored contents?\u003c\/strong\u003e Most home contents policies cover items in outbuildings up to a stated limit (often £1,000-£3,000), with conditions about lock type and structure. Check your policy schedule before storing anything high-value.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor more on sheds, see our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/garden-storage-sheds\"\u003esheds buying guide\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Garden Storage","offers":[{"title":"Grey","offer_id":57903896592729,"sku":"GSH-8p85X4p72FT-GREY-19","price":472.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1041\/5557\/8713\/files\/S430bb00ed386443b8f574e6d8591680cG.webp?v=1776959176"},{"product_id":"waterproof-garden-shed-grey-0884","title":"Resin Garden Shed Range — Grey","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eA UV-stabilised resin shed that shrugs off rain, doesn't rot and never needs repainting.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMoulded from UV-stabilised resin — the same material we use across our waterproof range, chosen because it doesn't rot, doesn't fade and never needs re-staining. Panels are thicker than most at this price point and joints are sealed rather than painted over, so water genuinely can't creep in.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSealed joints and drainage channels at the base keep the inside dry even in sustained rain. The floor panels are rated for a walk-behind mower, a mid-size BBQ or a pair of adult bikes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat's included\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e \u003cli\u003e1 × garden shed (flat-packed)\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eFoundation brackets (no floor — see care notes)\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eSpring-latch door with retrofit hasp\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eRidge detail for passive airflow\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eNumbered panels, hardware pack and printed instructions\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDesigned for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e \u003cli\u003eHand tools, a walk-behind mower and garden-power kit\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eBike and tool combined storage where floor space is tight\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003ePotting, hobby or general outdoor workshop space\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCare \u0026amp; maintenance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWipe clean with a damp cloth and mild detergent. No annual re-treatment needed; the resin is UV-stabilised so colour fade is minimal. Avoid solvents and power-washing at close range.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"seo-content\"\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eThe bigger picture\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBuying a garden shed is one of those decisions you live with for years. Resin Garden Shed Range — Grey sits in our plastic category, which has specific characteristics worth understanding before purchase. The product specs above tell you what; the section below tells you why those specs matter and what to expect over the unit's lifetime.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePlastic and resin construction — what UV-stabilised resin buys you\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlastic garden storage covers a wide quality range. The cheap end is commodity HDPE engineered for two summers; the Resin Garden Shed Range — Grey sits at the other end — UV-stabilised resin engineered for ten or more.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe differences that determine lifetime:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV stabilisation\u003c\/strong\u003e — additives in the polymer formulation that resist breakdown from sunlight. Without these, plastic goes chalky in 18 months and brittle in 3–4 years. Stabilised plastic stays flexible and structurally sound for a decade or more.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWall thickness\u003c\/strong\u003e — quality resin units use 4mm+ walls, visible at the lid lip. Cheap commodity plastic is 2–3mm and flexes when leaned on.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFrost rating\u003c\/strong\u003e — stabilised resin handles -20°C without cracking. Commodity HDPE goes brittle at -5°C and cracks under impact.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSealed joinery\u003c\/strong\u003e — corner joints and lid gaskets that keep water out. The mark of an engineered product, not a moulded plastic shell.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe differences are usually invisible at the marketing level — manufacturers don't volunteer \"we use cheap plastic\" — but they show up unmistakably after the first 18 months in a UK garden.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSizing and what fits\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe exact dimensions and capacity for this product are in the specifications above. As a general guide for our sheds range:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFootprint\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWhat fits\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4×3 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMower + basic tools\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6×4 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMower, strimmer, hand tools, 1 bike\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8×6 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 bikes, tools, BBQ, garden chairs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10×8 ft+\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorkshop space + storage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInternal dimensions are what matter for fit; external dimensions matter for placement clearance. Quoted capacity is brim-full; usable capacity is roughly 70-80% of that, since you can't pack to the lid and expect to retrieve bottom items.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eUK weather considerations\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBritish gardens see 1,000-1,200mm of annual rainfall, frost cycling between -5°C and +10°C through winter, and summer UV exposure that damages unstabilised materials. The Resin Garden Shed Range — Grey is engineered against those specific conditions. Practical implications:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFrost\u003c\/strong\u003e — products in this range are rated for sustained sub-zero temperatures without cracking. The cheap alternatives aren't.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV\u003c\/strong\u003e — UV-stabilised plastics, hot-dip galvanised metal, and pressure-treated timber all handle UK summer sun. Commodity equivalents fail visibly within 2–3 years.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWind\u003c\/strong\u003e — exposed gardens (hilltops, coastal locations, wide gardens with no windbreaks) need anchoring. Most products in this range include floor anchor points; use them.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDriving rain\u003c\/strong\u003e — sealed lid gaskets and overhung roof edges keep wind-driven rain out. Look for these features specifically if your site is exposed.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBase preparation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe single most-skipped step on outdoor storage installation. All sheds need a level, solid base. Three good options: concrete slab (gold standard, 25-year base), paving flags on hardcore (cheaper, perfectly fine for sheds up to 8×6 ft), or a pressure-treated timber base on bearers for slightly uneven ground. Don't put a shed directly on grass.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDon't put any storage unit directly on grass. The base will move; lid seals will fail; condensation underneath will accelerate component failure. Plan the base before ordering the product.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDelivery and assembly\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis product ships from our UK warehouse with free mainland delivery on orders over £100. Standard delivery is 5–7 working days, tracked. This product ships pallet-direct to your kerbside. The driver won't bring the pallet down a path, up steps, or inside. Plan for help moving it from the kerb — two people minimum, or a pallet truck for the very largest. You'll get a dispatch email with a tracking link; the courier will text or email a delivery window the day before.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAssembly is the bigger task in this category — 2-3 hours for sheds up to 6×4 ft with two people, longer for larger units. You'll want a screwdriver, a 10mm spanner, a level, and a step-ladder for the roof. Manufacturer-quoted times tend to be optimistic by 30-50% on first build. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/assembly\"\u003eassembly help page\u003c\/a\u003e for tools, time estimates, and where to book a Tasker if you'd rather not DIY.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eReturns and consumer protection\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEvery order is covered by your full UK consumer protections:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConsumer Rights Act 2015\u003c\/strong\u003e — the goods must be of satisfactory quality, fit for purpose, and as described. Your statutory rights apply automatically and never expire.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConsumer Contracts Regulations 2013\u003c\/strong\u003e — 14 days from receipt to change your mind, no reason needed. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/returns\"\u003ereturns page\u003c\/a\u003e for the process.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e30-day damaged-on-arrival guarantee\u003c\/strong\u003e — if anything's wrong on delivery, email us with photos and we'll arrange a free replacement or full refund including return postage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor order questions, delivery updates, or post-purchase support, email \u003ca href=\"mailto:hello@garden-storage.com\"\u003ehello@garden-storage.com\u003c\/a\u003e or call \u003ca href=\"tel:+447383567839\"\u003e+44 7383 567839\u003c\/a\u003e Mon–Fri 9am–5pm. We respond to email within one UK working day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCommon questions about sheds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDo I need planning permission?\u003c\/strong\u003e In England, sheds under 2.5m high covering less than 50% of garden area are usually permitted development. Conservation Areas, listed buildings and AONBs have stricter rules — check with your council.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat's covered by the warranty?\u003c\/strong\u003e Manufacturer-specific structural warranties apply (typically 5-10 years for plastic, 10-20 for metal galvanised). Your Consumer Rights Act 2015 protections apply on top — satisfactory quality, fit for purpose, as described — and never expire.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow does insurance work for stored contents?\u003c\/strong\u003e Most home contents policies cover items in outbuildings up to a stated limit (often £1,000-£3,000), with conditions about lock type and structure. Check your policy schedule before storing anything high-value.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor more on sheds, see our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/garden-storage-sheds\"\u003esheds buying guide\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Garden Storage","offers":[{"title":"1.2m","offer_id":57903896985945,"sku":"GSH-12M-GREY-20","price":2065.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"2.2m","offer_id":57903897018713,"sku":"GSH-22M-GREY-20","price":2816.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.2m","offer_id":57903897051481,"sku":"GSH-32M-GREY-20","price":3380.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"4.2m","offer_id":57903897084249,"sku":"GSH-42M-GREY-20","price":4206.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"5.2m","offer_id":57903897117017,"sku":"GSH-52M-GREY-20","price":5070.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1041\/5557\/8713\/files\/Sb2903f0ef928401c991cf63001385ce4S.webp?v=1776959179"},{"product_id":"6x6-garden-shed-grey","title":"Garden Storage Shed — multiple sizes, grey","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eA galvanised steel shed with a powder-coat finish — tidy, honest storage for tools, mowers and garden kit.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBuilt from 0.4mm galvanised steel with a powder-coat finish on top of the zinc layer. That's two barriers between the steel and the weather, which is why the panels don't rust-bloom at the cut edges the way budget alternatives do. Pre-drilled panels and clearly numbered parts keep the flat-pack assembly predictable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe floor panels are rated for a walk-behind mower, a mid-size BBQ or a pair of adult bikes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat's included\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e \u003cli\u003e1 × 6×6ft garden shed (flat-packed)\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eReinforced floor panel and fixings\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eSpring-latch door with retrofit hasp\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eRidge detail for passive airflow\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eNumbered panels, hardware pack and printed instructions\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDesigned for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e \u003cli\u003eHand tools, a walk-behind mower and garden-power kit\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eBike and tool combined storage where floor space is tight\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003ePotting, hobby or general outdoor workshop space\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCare \u0026amp; maintenance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWipe clean with a damp cloth. Check bolts once a year, and touch up any exposed steel with enamel paint if a knock breaks the powder-coat. Re-seal the base perimeter if standing water starts to show.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"seo-content\"\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eThe bigger picture\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBuying a garden shed is one of those decisions you live with for years. 6x6 Garden Shed — Grey sits in our plastic category, which has specific characteristics worth understanding before purchase. The product specs above tell you what; the section below tells you why those specs matter and what to expect over the unit's lifetime.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePlastic and resin construction — what UV-stabilised resin buys you\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlastic garden storage covers a wide quality range. The cheap end is commodity HDPE engineered for two summers; the 6x6 Garden Shed — Grey sits at the other end — UV-stabilised resin engineered for ten or more.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe differences that determine lifetime:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV stabilisation\u003c\/strong\u003e — additives in the polymer formulation that resist breakdown from sunlight. Without these, plastic goes chalky in 18 months and brittle in 3–4 years. Stabilised plastic stays flexible and structurally sound for a decade or more.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWall thickness\u003c\/strong\u003e — quality resin units use 4mm+ walls, visible at the lid lip. Cheap commodity plastic is 2–3mm and flexes when leaned on.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFrost rating\u003c\/strong\u003e — stabilised resin handles -20°C without cracking. Commodity HDPE goes brittle at -5°C and cracks under impact.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSealed joinery\u003c\/strong\u003e — corner joints and lid gaskets that keep water out. The mark of an engineered product, not a moulded plastic shell.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe differences are usually invisible at the marketing level — manufacturers don't volunteer \"we use cheap plastic\" — but they show up unmistakably after the first 18 months in a UK garden.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSizing and what fits\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe exact dimensions and capacity for this product are in the specifications above. As a general guide for our sheds range:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFootprint\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWhat fits\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4×3 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMower + basic tools\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6×4 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMower, strimmer, hand tools, 1 bike\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8×6 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 bikes, tools, BBQ, garden chairs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10×8 ft+\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorkshop space + storage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInternal dimensions are what matter for fit; external dimensions matter for placement clearance. Quoted capacity is brim-full; usable capacity is roughly 70-80% of that, since you can't pack to the lid and expect to retrieve bottom items.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eUK weather considerations\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBritish gardens see 1,000-1,200mm of annual rainfall, frost cycling between -5°C and +10°C through winter, and summer UV exposure that damages unstabilised materials. The 6x6 Garden Shed — Grey is engineered against those specific conditions. Practical implications:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFrost\u003c\/strong\u003e — products in this range are rated for sustained sub-zero temperatures without cracking. The cheap alternatives aren't.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV\u003c\/strong\u003e — UV-stabilised plastics, hot-dip galvanised metal, and pressure-treated timber all handle UK summer sun. Commodity equivalents fail visibly within 2–3 years.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWind\u003c\/strong\u003e — exposed gardens (hilltops, coastal locations, wide gardens with no windbreaks) need anchoring. Most products in this range include floor anchor points; use them.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDriving rain\u003c\/strong\u003e — sealed lid gaskets and overhung roof edges keep wind-driven rain out. Look for these features specifically if your site is exposed.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBase preparation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe single most-skipped step on outdoor storage installation. All sheds need a level, solid base. Three good options: concrete slab (gold standard, 25-year base), paving flags on hardcore (cheaper, perfectly fine for sheds up to 8×6 ft), or a pressure-treated timber base on bearers for slightly uneven ground. Don't put a shed directly on grass.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDon't put any storage unit directly on grass. The base will move; lid seals will fail; condensation underneath will accelerate component failure. Plan the base before ordering the product.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDelivery and assembly\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis product ships from our UK warehouse with free mainland delivery on orders over £100. Standard delivery is 5–7 working days, tracked. This product ships pallet-direct to your kerbside. The driver won't bring the pallet down a path, up steps, or inside. Plan for help moving it from the kerb — two people minimum, or a pallet truck for the very largest. You'll get a dispatch email with a tracking link; the courier will text or email a delivery window the day before.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAssembly is the bigger task in this category — 2-3 hours for sheds up to 6×4 ft with two people, longer for larger units. You'll want a screwdriver, a 10mm spanner, a level, and a step-ladder for the roof. Manufacturer-quoted times tend to be optimistic by 30-50% on first build. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/assembly\"\u003eassembly help page\u003c\/a\u003e for tools, time estimates, and where to book a Tasker if you'd rather not DIY.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eReturns and consumer protection\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEvery order is covered by your full UK consumer protections:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConsumer Rights Act 2015\u003c\/strong\u003e — the goods must be of satisfactory quality, fit for purpose, and as described. Your statutory rights apply automatically and never expire.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConsumer Contracts Regulations 2013\u003c\/strong\u003e — 14 days from receipt to change your mind, no reason needed. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/returns\"\u003ereturns page\u003c\/a\u003e for the process.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e30-day damaged-on-arrival guarantee\u003c\/strong\u003e — if anything's wrong on delivery, email us with photos and we'll arrange a free replacement or full refund including return postage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor order questions, delivery updates, or post-purchase support, email \u003ca href=\"mailto:hello@garden-storage.com\"\u003ehello@garden-storage.com\u003c\/a\u003e or call \u003ca href=\"tel:+447383567839\"\u003e+44 7383 567839\u003c\/a\u003e Mon–Fri 9am–5pm. We respond to email within one UK working day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCommon questions about sheds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDo I need planning permission?\u003c\/strong\u003e In England, sheds under 2.5m high covering less than 50% of garden area are usually permitted development. Conservation Areas, listed buildings and AONBs have stricter rules — check with your council.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat's covered by the warranty?\u003c\/strong\u003e Manufacturer-specific structural warranties apply (typically 5-10 years for plastic, 10-20 for metal galvanised). Your Consumer Rights Act 2015 protections apply on top — satisfactory quality, fit for purpose, as described — and never expire.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow does insurance work for stored contents?\u003c\/strong\u003e Most home contents policies cover items in outbuildings up to a stated limit (often £1,000-£3,000), with conditions about lock type and structure. Check your policy schedule before storing anything high-value.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor more on sheds, see our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/garden-storage-sheds\"\u003esheds buying guide\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Garden Storage","offers":[{"title":"70 50 139cm B","offer_id":57903897870681,"sku":"GSH-7050139CMB-GREY-22","price":847.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"190x120x196cmC","offer_id":57903897903449,"sku":"GSH-190X120X19-GREY-22","price":1123.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"198x160x196cm A","offer_id":57903897936217,"sku":"GSH-198X160X19-GREY-22","price":1324.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"180 180 196cm B","offer_id":57903897968985,"sku":"GSH-180180196C-GREY-22","price":1490.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"180 180 196cm A","offer_id":57903898001753,"sku":"GSH-180180196C-GREY-22-2","price":1490.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"238x194x196cm A","offer_id":57903898034521,"sku":"GSH-238X194X19-GREY-22","price":1498.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1041\/5557\/8713\/files\/Sf721eb85d9a74f91a0676d2d23bf90d7X.webp?v=1776959183"},{"product_id":"4x8-lockable-garden-shed-grey","title":"4x8 Lockable Garden Shed — Grey","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eA galvanised steel shed with a powder-coat finish — tidy, honest storage for tools, mowers and garden kit.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBuilt from 0.4mm galvanised steel with a powder-coat finish on top of the zinc layer. That's two barriers between the steel and the weather, which is why the panels don't rust-bloom at the cut edges the way budget alternatives do. Pre-drilled panels and clearly numbered parts keep the flat-pack assembly predictable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe door has a reinforced frame and a pre-fitted hasp so you can add your own Sold Secure padlock (sold separately). The floor panels are rated for a walk-behind mower, a mid-size BBQ or a pair of adult bikes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat's included\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e1 × 4×8ft garden shed (flat-packed)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eReinforced floor panel and fixings\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eLockable door with reinforced frame\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eRidge detail for passive airflow\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eNumbered panels, hardware pack and printed instructions\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDesigned for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eHand tools, a walk-behind mower and garden-power kit\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eBike and tool combined storage where floor space is tight\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003ePotting, hobby or general outdoor workshop space\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eLocked storage for valuable tools or bikes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCare \u0026amp; maintenance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWipe clean with a damp cloth. Check bolts once a year, and touch up any exposed steel with enamel paint if a knock breaks the powder-coat. Re-seal the base perimeter if standing water starts to show.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"seo-content\"\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat this means for your garden\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 4x8 Lockable Garden Shed — Grey is one of our plastic sheds, sized and engineered for typical UK garden use. A shed is the kind of purchase you make once and keep for a decade — or twice in five years if you buy badly. The notes below explain the full lifecycle picture and where this product sits within it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePlastic and resin construction — what UV-stabilised resin buys you\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlastic garden storage covers a wide quality range. The cheap end is commodity HDPE engineered for two summers; the 4x8 Lockable Garden Shed — Grey sits at the other end — UV-stabilised resin engineered for ten or more.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe differences that determine lifetime:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV stabilisation\u003c\/strong\u003e — additives in the polymer formulation that resist breakdown from sunlight. Without these, plastic goes chalky in 18 months and brittle in 3–4 years. Stabilised plastic stays flexible and structurally sound for a decade or more.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWall thickness\u003c\/strong\u003e — quality resin units use 4mm+ walls, visible at the lid lip. Cheap commodity plastic is 2–3mm and flexes when leaned on.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFrost rating\u003c\/strong\u003e — stabilised resin handles -20°C without cracking. Commodity HDPE goes brittle at -5°C and cracks under impact.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSealed joinery\u003c\/strong\u003e — corner joints and lid gaskets that keep water out. The mark of an engineered product, not a moulded plastic shell.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe differences are usually invisible at the marketing level — manufacturers don't volunteer \"we use cheap plastic\" — but they show up unmistakably after the first 18 months in a UK garden.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSizing and what fits\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe exact dimensions and capacity for this product are in the specifications above. As a general guide for our sheds range:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFootprint\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWhat fits\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4×3 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMower + basic tools\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6×4 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMower, strimmer, hand tools, 1 bike\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8×6 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 bikes, tools, BBQ, garden chairs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10×8 ft+\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorkshop space + storage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInternal dimensions are what matter for fit; external dimensions matter for placement clearance. Quoted capacity is brim-full; usable capacity is roughly 70-80% of that, since you can't pack to the lid and expect to retrieve bottom items.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eUK weather considerations\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBritish gardens see 1,000-1,200mm of annual rainfall, frost cycling between -5°C and +10°C through winter, and summer UV exposure that damages unstabilised materials. The 4x8 Lockable Garden Shed — Grey is engineered against those specific conditions. Practical implications:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFrost\u003c\/strong\u003e — products in this range are rated for sustained sub-zero temperatures without cracking. The cheap alternatives aren't.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV\u003c\/strong\u003e — UV-stabilised plastics, hot-dip galvanised metal, and pressure-treated timber all handle UK summer sun. Commodity equivalents fail visibly within 2–3 years.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWind\u003c\/strong\u003e — exposed gardens (hilltops, coastal locations, wide gardens with no windbreaks) need anchoring. Most products in this range include floor anchor points; use them.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDriving rain\u003c\/strong\u003e — sealed lid gaskets and overhung roof edges keep wind-driven rain out. Look for these features specifically if your site is exposed.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBase preparation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe single most-skipped step on outdoor storage installation. All sheds need a level, solid base. Three good options: concrete slab (gold standard, 25-year base), paving flags on hardcore (cheaper, perfectly fine for sheds up to 8×6 ft), or a pressure-treated timber base on bearers for slightly uneven ground. Don't put a shed directly on grass.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDon't put any storage unit directly on grass. The base will move; lid seals will fail; condensation underneath will accelerate component failure. Plan the base before ordering the product.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDelivery and assembly\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis product ships from our UK warehouse with free mainland delivery on orders over £100. Standard delivery is 5–7 working days, tracked. This product ships pallet-direct to your kerbside. The driver won't bring the pallet down a path, up steps, or inside. Plan for help moving it from the kerb — two people minimum, or a pallet truck for the very largest. You'll get a dispatch email with a tracking link; the courier will text or email a delivery window the day before.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAssembly is the bigger task in this category — 2-3 hours for sheds up to 6×4 ft with two people, longer for larger units. You'll want a screwdriver, a 10mm spanner, a level, and a step-ladder for the roof. Manufacturer-quoted times tend to be optimistic by 30-50% on first build. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/assembly\"\u003eassembly help page\u003c\/a\u003e for tools, time estimates, and where to book a Tasker if you'd rather not DIY.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eReturns and consumer protection\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEvery order is covered by your full UK consumer protections:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConsumer Rights Act 2015\u003c\/strong\u003e — the goods must be of satisfactory quality, fit for purpose, and as described. Your statutory rights apply automatically and never expire.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConsumer Contracts Regulations 2013\u003c\/strong\u003e — 14 days from receipt to change your mind, no reason needed. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/returns\"\u003ereturns page\u003c\/a\u003e for the process.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e30-day damaged-on-arrival guarantee\u003c\/strong\u003e — if anything's wrong on delivery, email us with photos and we'll arrange a free replacement or full refund including return postage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor order questions, delivery updates, or post-purchase support, email \u003ca href=\"mailto:hello@garden-storage.com\"\u003ehello@garden-storage.com\u003c\/a\u003e or call \u003ca href=\"tel:+447383567839\"\u003e+44 7383 567839\u003c\/a\u003e Mon–Fri 9am–5pm. We respond to email within one UK working day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCommon questions about sheds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDo I need planning permission?\u003c\/strong\u003e In England, sheds under 2.5m high covering less than 50% of garden area are usually permitted development. Conservation Areas, listed buildings and AONBs have stricter rules — check with your council.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat's covered by the warranty?\u003c\/strong\u003e Manufacturer-specific structural warranties apply (typically 5-10 years for plastic, 10-20 for metal galvanised). Your Consumer Rights Act 2015 protections apply on top — satisfactory quality, fit for purpose, as described — and never expire.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow does insurance work for stored contents?\u003c\/strong\u003e Most home contents policies cover items in outbuildings up to a stated limit (often £1,000-£3,000), with conditions about lock type and structure. Check your policy schedule before storing anything high-value.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor more on sheds, see our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/garden-storage-sheds\"\u003esheds buying guide\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Garden Storage","offers":[{"title":"Default","offer_id":57903898591577,"sku":"GSH-4X8FT-GREY-23","price":410.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1041\/5557\/8713\/files\/S6703a9275922469f90c0a92a5b5f2178s.webp?v=1776959186"},{"product_id":"4x3-lockable-garden-shed-grey","title":"4x3 Lockable Garden Shed — Grey","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eA UV-stabilised resin shed that shrugs off rain, doesn't rot and never needs repainting.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMoulded from UV-stabilised resin — the same material we use across our waterproof range, chosen because it doesn't rot, doesn't fade and never needs re-staining. Panels are thicker than most at this price point and joints are sealed rather than painted over, so water genuinely can't creep in.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe door has a reinforced frame and a pre-fitted hasp so you can add your own Sold Secure padlock (sold separately). Integrated gable vents stop condensation building up. The floor panels are rated for a walk-behind mower, a mid-size BBQ or a pair of adult bikes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat's included\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e1 × 4×3ft garden shed (flat-packed)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eReinforced floor panel and fixings\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eLockable door with reinforced frame\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eGable vent(s)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eNumbered panels, hardware pack and printed instructions\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDesigned for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eHand tools, a walk-behind mower and garden-power kit\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eBike and tool combined storage where floor space is tight\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003ePotting, hobby or general outdoor workshop space\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eLocked storage for valuable tools or bikes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCare \u0026amp; maintenance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWipe clean with a damp cloth and mild detergent. No annual re-treatment needed; the resin is UV-stabilised so colour fade is minimal. Avoid solvents and power-washing at close range.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"seo-content\"\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat this means for your garden\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 4x3 Lockable Garden Shed — Grey is one of our plastic sheds, sized and engineered for typical UK garden use. A shed is the kind of purchase you make once and keep for a decade — or twice in five years if you buy badly. The notes below explain the full lifecycle picture and where this product sits within it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePlastic and resin construction — what UV-stabilised resin buys you\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlastic garden storage covers a wide quality range. The cheap end is commodity HDPE engineered for two summers; the 4x3 Lockable Garden Shed — Grey sits at the other end — UV-stabilised resin engineered for ten or more.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe differences that determine lifetime:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV stabilisation\u003c\/strong\u003e — additives in the polymer formulation that resist breakdown from sunlight. Without these, plastic goes chalky in 18 months and brittle in 3–4 years. Stabilised plastic stays flexible and structurally sound for a decade or more.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWall thickness\u003c\/strong\u003e — quality resin units use 4mm+ walls, visible at the lid lip. Cheap commodity plastic is 2–3mm and flexes when leaned on.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFrost rating\u003c\/strong\u003e — stabilised resin handles -20°C without cracking. Commodity HDPE goes brittle at -5°C and cracks under impact.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSealed joinery\u003c\/strong\u003e — corner joints and lid gaskets that keep water out. The mark of an engineered product, not a moulded plastic shell.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe differences are usually invisible at the marketing level — manufacturers don't volunteer \"we use cheap plastic\" — but they show up unmistakably after the first 18 months in a UK garden.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSizing and what fits\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe exact dimensions and capacity for this product are in the specifications above. As a general guide for our sheds range:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFootprint\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWhat fits\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4×3 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMower + basic tools\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6×4 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMower, strimmer, hand tools, 1 bike\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8×6 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 bikes, tools, BBQ, garden chairs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10×8 ft+\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorkshop space + storage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInternal dimensions are what matter for fit; external dimensions matter for placement clearance. Quoted capacity is brim-full; usable capacity is roughly 70-80% of that, since you can't pack to the lid and expect to retrieve bottom items.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eUK weather considerations\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBritish gardens see 1,000-1,200mm of annual rainfall, frost cycling between -5°C and +10°C through winter, and summer UV exposure that damages unstabilised materials. The 4x3 Lockable Garden Shed — Grey is engineered against those specific conditions. Practical implications:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFrost\u003c\/strong\u003e — products in this range are rated for sustained sub-zero temperatures without cracking. The cheap alternatives aren't.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV\u003c\/strong\u003e — UV-stabilised plastics, hot-dip galvanised metal, and pressure-treated timber all handle UK summer sun. Commodity equivalents fail visibly within 2–3 years.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWind\u003c\/strong\u003e — exposed gardens (hilltops, coastal locations, wide gardens with no windbreaks) need anchoring. Most products in this range include floor anchor points; use them.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDriving rain\u003c\/strong\u003e — sealed lid gaskets and overhung roof edges keep wind-driven rain out. Look for these features specifically if your site is exposed.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBase preparation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe single most-skipped step on outdoor storage installation. All sheds need a level, solid base. Three good options: concrete slab (gold standard, 25-year base), paving flags on hardcore (cheaper, perfectly fine for sheds up to 8×6 ft), or a pressure-treated timber base on bearers for slightly uneven ground. Don't put a shed directly on grass.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDon't put any storage unit directly on grass. The base will move; lid seals will fail; condensation underneath will accelerate component failure. Plan the base before ordering the product.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDelivery and assembly\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis product ships from our UK warehouse with free mainland delivery on orders over £100. Standard delivery is 5–7 working days, tracked. This product ships pallet-direct to your kerbside. The driver won't bring the pallet down a path, up steps, or inside. Plan for help moving it from the kerb — two people minimum, or a pallet truck for the very largest. You'll get a dispatch email with a tracking link; the courier will text or email a delivery window the day before.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAssembly is the bigger task in this category — 2-3 hours for sheds up to 6×4 ft with two people, longer for larger units. You'll want a screwdriver, a 10mm spanner, a level, and a step-ladder for the roof. Manufacturer-quoted times tend to be optimistic by 30-50% on first build. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/assembly\"\u003eassembly help page\u003c\/a\u003e for tools, time estimates, and where to book a Tasker if you'd rather not DIY.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eReturns and consumer protection\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEvery order is covered by your full UK consumer protections:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConsumer Rights Act 2015\u003c\/strong\u003e — the goods must be of satisfactory quality, fit for purpose, and as described. Your statutory rights apply automatically and never expire.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConsumer Contracts Regulations 2013\u003c\/strong\u003e — 14 days from receipt to change your mind, no reason needed. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/returns\"\u003ereturns page\u003c\/a\u003e for the process.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e30-day damaged-on-arrival guarantee\u003c\/strong\u003e — if anything's wrong on delivery, email us with photos and we'll arrange a free replacement or full refund including return postage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor order questions, delivery updates, or post-purchase support, email \u003ca href=\"mailto:hello@garden-storage.com\"\u003ehello@garden-storage.com\u003c\/a\u003e or call \u003ca href=\"tel:+447383567839\"\u003e+44 7383 567839\u003c\/a\u003e Mon–Fri 9am–5pm. We respond to email within one UK working day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCommon questions about sheds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDo I need planning permission?\u003c\/strong\u003e In England, sheds under 2.5m high covering less than 50% of garden area are usually permitted development. Conservation Areas, listed buildings and AONBs have stricter rules — check with your council.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat's covered by the warranty?\u003c\/strong\u003e Manufacturer-specific structural warranties apply (typically 5-10 years for plastic, 10-20 for metal galvanised). Your Consumer Rights Act 2015 protections apply on top — satisfactory quality, fit for purpose, as described — and never expire.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow does insurance work for stored contents?\u003c\/strong\u003e Most home contents policies cover items in outbuildings up to a stated limit (often £1,000-£3,000), with conditions about lock type and structure. Check your policy schedule before storing anything high-value.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor more on sheds, see our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/garden-storage-sheds\"\u003esheds buying guide\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Garden Storage","offers":[{"title":"4x3 ft","offer_id":57903898984793,"sku":"GSH-4X3FT-GREY-24","price":375.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"5x3 ft","offer_id":57903899017561,"sku":"GSH-5X3FT-GREY-24","price":386.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"5x4 ft","offer_id":57903899050329,"sku":"GSH-5X4FT-GREY-24","price":418.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"6x4 ft","offer_id":57903899083097,"sku":"GSH-6X4FT-GREY-24","price":492.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1041\/5557\/8713\/files\/Se790dd3d1b964aad8a2bdde9d7966756j.webp?v=1776959187"},{"product_id":"8x8-waterproof-garden-shed-grey","title":"Waterproof Garden Shed — 6×8, 8×8 or 10×8 ft","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eA galvanised steel shed with sealed joints and drainage channels — dry storage through every British season.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBuilt from 0.4mm galvanised steel with a powder-coat finish on top of the zinc layer. That's two barriers between the steel and the weather, which is why the panels don't rust-bloom at the cut edges the way budget alternatives do. Pre-drilled panels and clearly numbered parts keep the flat-pack assembly predictable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSealed joints and drainage channels at the base keep the inside dry even in sustained rain. The floor panels are rated for a walk-behind mower, a mid-size BBQ or a pair of adult bikes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat's included\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e \u003cli\u003e1 × 8×8ft garden shed (flat-packed)\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eReinforced floor panel and fixings\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eSpring-latch door with retrofit hasp\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eRidge detail for passive airflow\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eNumbered panels, hardware pack and printed instructions\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDesigned for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e \u003cli\u003eHand tools, a walk-behind mower and garden-power kit\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eBike and tool combined storage where floor space is tight\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003ePotting, hobby or general outdoor workshop space\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCare \u0026amp; maintenance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWipe clean with a damp cloth. Check bolts once a year, and touch up any exposed steel with enamel paint if a knock breaks the powder-coat. Re-seal the base perimeter if standing water starts to show.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"seo-content\"\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhere this fits in the range\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Waterproof Garden Shed — 6×8, 8×8 or 10×8 ft is from our plastic shed collection. The decisions you make at purchase — material, size, base preparation, security — determine whether you'll thank yourself in 10 years' time or be replacing the unit halfway through.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePlastic and resin construction — what UV-stabilised resin buys you\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlastic garden storage covers a wide quality range. The cheap end is commodity HDPE engineered for two summers; the Waterproof Garden Shed — 6×8, 8×8 or 10×8 ft sits at the other end — UV-stabilised resin engineered for ten or more.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe differences that determine lifetime:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV stabilisation\u003c\/strong\u003e — additives in the polymer formulation that resist breakdown from sunlight. Without these, plastic goes chalky in 18 months and brittle in 3–4 years. Stabilised plastic stays flexible and structurally sound for a decade or more.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWall thickness\u003c\/strong\u003e — quality resin units use 4mm+ walls, visible at the lid lip. Cheap commodity plastic is 2–3mm and flexes when leaned on.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFrost rating\u003c\/strong\u003e — stabilised resin handles -20°C without cracking. Commodity HDPE goes brittle at -5°C and cracks under impact.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSealed joinery\u003c\/strong\u003e — corner joints and lid gaskets that keep water out. The mark of an engineered product, not a moulded plastic shell.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe differences are usually invisible at the marketing level — manufacturers don't volunteer \"we use cheap plastic\" — but they show up unmistakably after the first 18 months in a UK garden.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSizing and what fits\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe exact dimensions and capacity for this product are in the specifications above. As a general guide for our sheds range:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFootprint\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWhat fits\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4×3 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMower + basic tools\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6×4 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMower, strimmer, hand tools, 1 bike\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8×6 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 bikes, tools, BBQ, garden chairs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10×8 ft+\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorkshop space + storage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInternal dimensions are what matter for fit; external dimensions matter for placement clearance. Quoted capacity is brim-full; usable capacity is roughly 70-80% of that, since you can't pack to the lid and expect to retrieve bottom items.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eUK weather considerations\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBritish gardens see 1,000-1,200mm of annual rainfall, frost cycling between -5°C and +10°C through winter, and summer UV exposure that damages unstabilised materials. The Waterproof Garden Shed — 6×8, 8×8 or 10×8 ft is engineered against those specific conditions. Practical implications:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFrost\u003c\/strong\u003e — products in this range are rated for sustained sub-zero temperatures without cracking. The cheap alternatives aren't.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV\u003c\/strong\u003e — UV-stabilised plastics, hot-dip galvanised metal, and pressure-treated timber all handle UK summer sun. Commodity equivalents fail visibly within 2–3 years.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWind\u003c\/strong\u003e — exposed gardens (hilltops, coastal locations, wide gardens with no windbreaks) need anchoring. Most products in this range include floor anchor points; use them.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDriving rain\u003c\/strong\u003e — sealed lid gaskets and overhung roof edges keep wind-driven rain out. Look for these features specifically if your site is exposed.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBase preparation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe single most-skipped step on outdoor storage installation. All sheds need a level, solid base. Three good options: concrete slab (gold standard, 25-year base), paving flags on hardcore (cheaper, perfectly fine for sheds up to 8×6 ft), or a pressure-treated timber base on bearers for slightly uneven ground. Don't put a shed directly on grass.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDon't put any storage unit directly on grass. The base will move; lid seals will fail; condensation underneath will accelerate component failure. Plan the base before ordering the product.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDelivery and assembly\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis product ships from our UK warehouse with free mainland delivery on orders over £100. Standard delivery is 5–7 working days, tracked. This product ships pallet-direct to your kerbside. The driver won't bring the pallet down a path, up steps, or inside. Plan for help moving it from the kerb — two people minimum, or a pallet truck for the very largest. You'll get a dispatch email with a tracking link; the courier will text or email a delivery window the day before.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAssembly is the bigger task in this category — 2-3 hours for sheds up to 6×4 ft with two people, longer for larger units. You'll want a screwdriver, a 10mm spanner, a level, and a step-ladder for the roof. Manufacturer-quoted times tend to be optimistic by 30-50% on first build. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/assembly\"\u003eassembly help page\u003c\/a\u003e for tools, time estimates, and where to book a Tasker if you'd rather not DIY.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eReturns and consumer protection\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEvery order is covered by your full UK consumer protections:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConsumer Rights Act 2015\u003c\/strong\u003e — the goods must be of satisfactory quality, fit for purpose, and as described. Your statutory rights apply automatically and never expire.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConsumer Contracts Regulations 2013\u003c\/strong\u003e — 14 days from receipt to change your mind, no reason needed. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/returns\"\u003ereturns page\u003c\/a\u003e for the process.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e30-day damaged-on-arrival guarantee\u003c\/strong\u003e — if anything's wrong on delivery, email us with photos and we'll arrange a free replacement or full refund including return postage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor order questions, delivery updates, or post-purchase support, email \u003ca href=\"mailto:hello@garden-storage.com\"\u003ehello@garden-storage.com\u003c\/a\u003e or call \u003ca href=\"tel:+447383567839\"\u003e+44 7383 567839\u003c\/a\u003e Mon–Fri 9am–5pm. We respond to email within one UK working day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCommon questions about sheds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDo I need planning permission?\u003c\/strong\u003e In England, sheds under 2.5m high covering less than 50% of garden area are usually permitted development. Conservation Areas, listed buildings and AONBs have stricter rules — check with your council.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat's covered by the warranty?\u003c\/strong\u003e Manufacturer-specific structural warranties apply (typically 5-10 years for plastic, 10-20 for metal galvanised). Your Consumer Rights Act 2015 protections apply on top — satisfactory quality, fit for purpose, as described — and never expire.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow does insurance work for stored contents?\u003c\/strong\u003e Most home contents policies cover items in outbuildings up to a stated limit (often £1,000-£3,000), with conditions about lock type and structure. Check your policy schedule before storing anything high-value.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor more on sheds, see our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/garden-storage-sheds\"\u003esheds buying guide\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Garden Storage","offers":[{"title":"6x8ft \/ Black","offer_id":57903899214169,"sku":"GSH-6X8FT-BLACK-25","price":423.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"6x8ft \/ Green","offer_id":57903899246937,"sku":"GSH-6X8FT-GREEN-25","price":423.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"8x8ft \/ Black","offer_id":57903899279705,"sku":"GSH-8X8FT-BLACK-25","price":518.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"8x8ft \/ Green","offer_id":57903899312473,"sku":"GSH-8X8FT-GREEN-25","price":518.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"10x8ft \/ Black","offer_id":57903899345241,"sku":"GSH-10X8FT-BLACK-25","price":500.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"10x8ft \/ Green","offer_id":57903899378009,"sku":"GSH-10X8FT-GREEN-25","price":500.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1041\/5557\/8713\/files\/S594a59ca5f334599b4d5da09fadd2a22g.webp?v=1776959191"},{"product_id":"6x4-waterproof-garden-shed-grey","title":"6x4 Waterproof Garden Shed — Grey","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eA galvanised steel shed with sealed joints and drainage channels — dry storage through every British season.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBuilt from 0.4mm galvanised steel with a powder-coat finish on top of the zinc layer. That's two barriers between the steel and the weather, which is why the panels don't rust-bloom at the cut edges the way budget alternatives do. Pre-drilled panels and clearly numbered parts keep the flat-pack assembly predictable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe door has a reinforced frame and a pre-fitted hasp so you can add your own Sold Secure padlock (sold separately). Integrated gable vents stop condensation building up. Sealed joints and drainage channels at the base keep the inside dry even in sustained rain. The floor panels are rated for a walk-behind mower, a mid-size BBQ or a pair of adult bikes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat's included\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e1 × 6×4ft garden shed (flat-packed)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eReinforced floor panel and fixings\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eLockable door with reinforced frame\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eGable vent(s)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eNumbered panels, hardware pack and printed instructions\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDesigned for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eHand tools, a walk-behind mower and garden-power kit\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eBike and tool combined storage where floor space is tight\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003ePotting, hobby or general outdoor workshop space\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eLocked storage for valuable tools or bikes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCare \u0026amp; maintenance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWipe clean with a damp cloth. Check bolts once a year, and touch up any exposed steel with enamel paint if a knock breaks the powder-coat. Re-seal the base perimeter if standing water starts to show.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"seo-content\"\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eThe bigger picture\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBuying a garden shed is one of those decisions you live with for years. 6x4 Waterproof Garden Shed — Grey sits in our plastic category, which has specific characteristics worth understanding before purchase. The product specs above tell you what; the section below tells you why those specs matter and what to expect over the unit's lifetime.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePlastic and resin construction — what UV-stabilised resin buys you\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlastic garden storage covers a wide quality range. The cheap end is commodity HDPE engineered for two summers; the 6x4 Waterproof Garden Shed — Grey sits at the other end — UV-stabilised resin engineered for ten or more.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe differences that determine lifetime:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV stabilisation\u003c\/strong\u003e — additives in the polymer formulation that resist breakdown from sunlight. Without these, plastic goes chalky in 18 months and brittle in 3–4 years. Stabilised plastic stays flexible and structurally sound for a decade or more.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWall thickness\u003c\/strong\u003e — quality resin units use 4mm+ walls, visible at the lid lip. Cheap commodity plastic is 2–3mm and flexes when leaned on.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFrost rating\u003c\/strong\u003e — stabilised resin handles -20°C without cracking. Commodity HDPE goes brittle at -5°C and cracks under impact.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSealed joinery\u003c\/strong\u003e — corner joints and lid gaskets that keep water out. The mark of an engineered product, not a moulded plastic shell.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe differences are usually invisible at the marketing level — manufacturers don't volunteer \"we use cheap plastic\" — but they show up unmistakably after the first 18 months in a UK garden.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSizing and what fits\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe exact dimensions and capacity for this product are in the specifications above. As a general guide for our sheds range:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFootprint\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWhat fits\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4×3 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMower + basic tools\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6×4 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMower, strimmer, hand tools, 1 bike\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8×6 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 bikes, tools, BBQ, garden chairs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10×8 ft+\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorkshop space + storage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInternal dimensions are what matter for fit; external dimensions matter for placement clearance. Quoted capacity is brim-full; usable capacity is roughly 70-80% of that, since you can't pack to the lid and expect to retrieve bottom items.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eUK weather considerations\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBritish gardens see 1,000-1,200mm of annual rainfall, frost cycling between -5°C and +10°C through winter, and summer UV exposure that damages unstabilised materials. The 6x4 Waterproof Garden Shed — Grey is engineered against those specific conditions. Practical implications:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFrost\u003c\/strong\u003e — products in this range are rated for sustained sub-zero temperatures without cracking. The cheap alternatives aren't.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV\u003c\/strong\u003e — UV-stabilised plastics, hot-dip galvanised metal, and pressure-treated timber all handle UK summer sun. Commodity equivalents fail visibly within 2–3 years.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWind\u003c\/strong\u003e — exposed gardens (hilltops, coastal locations, wide gardens with no windbreaks) need anchoring. Most products in this range include floor anchor points; use them.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDriving rain\u003c\/strong\u003e — sealed lid gaskets and overhung roof edges keep wind-driven rain out. Look for these features specifically if your site is exposed.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBase preparation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe single most-skipped step on outdoor storage installation. All sheds need a level, solid base. Three good options: concrete slab (gold standard, 25-year base), paving flags on hardcore (cheaper, perfectly fine for sheds up to 8×6 ft), or a pressure-treated timber base on bearers for slightly uneven ground. Don't put a shed directly on grass.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDon't put any storage unit directly on grass. The base will move; lid seals will fail; condensation underneath will accelerate component failure. Plan the base before ordering the product.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDelivery and assembly\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis product ships from our UK warehouse with free mainland delivery on orders over £100. Standard delivery is 5–7 working days, tracked. This product ships pallet-direct to your kerbside. The driver won't bring the pallet down a path, up steps, or inside. Plan for help moving it from the kerb — two people minimum, or a pallet truck for the very largest. You'll get a dispatch email with a tracking link; the courier will text or email a delivery window the day before.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAssembly is the bigger task in this category — 2-3 hours for sheds up to 6×4 ft with two people, longer for larger units. You'll want a screwdriver, a 10mm spanner, a level, and a step-ladder for the roof. Manufacturer-quoted times tend to be optimistic by 30-50% on first build. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/assembly\"\u003eassembly help page\u003c\/a\u003e for tools, time estimates, and where to book a Tasker if you'd rather not DIY.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eReturns and consumer protection\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEvery order is covered by your full UK consumer protections:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConsumer Rights Act 2015\u003c\/strong\u003e — the goods must be of satisfactory quality, fit for purpose, and as described. Your statutory rights apply automatically and never expire.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConsumer Contracts Regulations 2013\u003c\/strong\u003e — 14 days from receipt to change your mind, no reason needed. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/returns\"\u003ereturns page\u003c\/a\u003e for the process.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e30-day damaged-on-arrival guarantee\u003c\/strong\u003e — if anything's wrong on delivery, email us with photos and we'll arrange a free replacement or full refund including return postage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor order questions, delivery updates, or post-purchase support, email \u003ca href=\"mailto:hello@garden-storage.com\"\u003ehello@garden-storage.com\u003c\/a\u003e or call \u003ca href=\"tel:+447383567839\"\u003e+44 7383 567839\u003c\/a\u003e Mon–Fri 9am–5pm. We respond to email within one UK working day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCommon questions about sheds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDo I need planning permission?\u003c\/strong\u003e In England, sheds under 2.5m high covering less than 50% of garden area are usually permitted development. Conservation Areas, listed buildings and AONBs have stricter rules — check with your council.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat's covered by the warranty?\u003c\/strong\u003e Manufacturer-specific structural warranties apply (typically 5-10 years for plastic, 10-20 for metal galvanised). Your Consumer Rights Act 2015 protections apply on top — satisfactory quality, fit for purpose, as described — and never expire.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow does insurance work for stored contents?\u003c\/strong\u003e Most home contents policies cover items in outbuildings up to a stated limit (often £1,000-£3,000), with conditions about lock type and structure. Check your policy schedule before storing anything high-value.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor more on sheds, see our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/garden-storage-sheds\"\u003esheds buying guide\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Garden Storage","offers":[{"title":"Grey","offer_id":57903899509081,"sku":"GSH-6X4FT-GREY-26","price":302.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1041\/5557\/8713\/files\/S194574ebe66b4859851b48cc3d9ec89cD.webp?v=1776959192"},{"product_id":"7x4-garden-shed-grey","title":"7x4 Garden Shed — Grey","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eA galvanised steel shed with a powder-coat finish — tidy, honest storage for tools, mowers and garden kit.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBuilt from 0.4mm galvanised steel with a powder-coat finish on top of the zinc layer. That's two barriers between the steel and the weather, which is why the panels don't rust-bloom at the cut edges the way budget alternatives do. Pre-drilled panels and clearly numbered parts keep the flat-pack assembly predictable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIntegrated gable vents stop condensation building up. The floor panels are rated for a walk-behind mower, a mid-size BBQ or a pair of adult bikes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat's included\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e \u003cli\u003e1 × 7×4ft garden shed (flat-packed)\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eReinforced floor panel and fixings\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eSpring-latch door with retrofit hasp\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eGable vent(s)\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eNumbered panels, hardware pack and printed instructions\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDesigned for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e \u003cli\u003eHand tools, a walk-behind mower and garden-power kit\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eBike and tool combined storage where floor space is tight\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003ePotting, hobby or general outdoor workshop space\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCare \u0026amp; maintenance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWipe clean with a damp cloth. Check bolts once a year, and touch up any exposed steel with enamel paint if a knock breaks the powder-coat. Re-seal the base perimeter if standing water starts to show.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"seo-content\"\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhere this fits in the range\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 7x4 Garden Shed — Grey is from our plastic shed collection. The decisions you make at purchase — material, size, base preparation, security — determine whether you'll thank yourself in 10 years' time or be replacing the unit halfway through.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePlastic and resin construction — what UV-stabilised resin buys you\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlastic garden storage covers a wide quality range. The cheap end is commodity HDPE engineered for two summers; the 7x4 Garden Shed — Grey sits at the other end — UV-stabilised resin engineered for ten or more.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe differences that determine lifetime:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV stabilisation\u003c\/strong\u003e — additives in the polymer formulation that resist breakdown from sunlight. Without these, plastic goes chalky in 18 months and brittle in 3–4 years. Stabilised plastic stays flexible and structurally sound for a decade or more.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWall thickness\u003c\/strong\u003e — quality resin units use 4mm+ walls, visible at the lid lip. Cheap commodity plastic is 2–3mm and flexes when leaned on.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFrost rating\u003c\/strong\u003e — stabilised resin handles -20°C without cracking. Commodity HDPE goes brittle at -5°C and cracks under impact.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSealed joinery\u003c\/strong\u003e — corner joints and lid gaskets that keep water out. The mark of an engineered product, not a moulded plastic shell.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe differences are usually invisible at the marketing level — manufacturers don't volunteer \"we use cheap plastic\" — but they show up unmistakably after the first 18 months in a UK garden.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSizing and what fits\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe exact dimensions and capacity for this product are in the specifications above. As a general guide for our sheds range:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFootprint\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWhat fits\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4×3 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMower + basic tools\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6×4 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMower, strimmer, hand tools, 1 bike\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8×6 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 bikes, tools, BBQ, garden chairs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10×8 ft+\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorkshop space + storage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInternal dimensions are what matter for fit; external dimensions matter for placement clearance. Quoted capacity is brim-full; usable capacity is roughly 70-80% of that, since you can't pack to the lid and expect to retrieve bottom items.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eUK weather considerations\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBritish gardens see 1,000-1,200mm of annual rainfall, frost cycling between -5°C and +10°C through winter, and summer UV exposure that damages unstabilised materials. The 7x4 Garden Shed — Grey is engineered against those specific conditions. Practical implications:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFrost\u003c\/strong\u003e — products in this range are rated for sustained sub-zero temperatures without cracking. The cheap alternatives aren't.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV\u003c\/strong\u003e — UV-stabilised plastics, hot-dip galvanised metal, and pressure-treated timber all handle UK summer sun. Commodity equivalents fail visibly within 2–3 years.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWind\u003c\/strong\u003e — exposed gardens (hilltops, coastal locations, wide gardens with no windbreaks) need anchoring. Most products in this range include floor anchor points; use them.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDriving rain\u003c\/strong\u003e — sealed lid gaskets and overhung roof edges keep wind-driven rain out. Look for these features specifically if your site is exposed.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBase preparation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe single most-skipped step on outdoor storage installation. All sheds need a level, solid base. Three good options: concrete slab (gold standard, 25-year base), paving flags on hardcore (cheaper, perfectly fine for sheds up to 8×6 ft), or a pressure-treated timber base on bearers for slightly uneven ground. Don't put a shed directly on grass.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDon't put any storage unit directly on grass. The base will move; lid seals will fail; condensation underneath will accelerate component failure. Plan the base before ordering the product.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDelivery and assembly\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis product ships from our UK warehouse with free mainland delivery on orders over £100. Standard delivery is 5–7 working days, tracked. This product ships pallet-direct to your kerbside. The driver won't bring the pallet down a path, up steps, or inside. Plan for help moving it from the kerb — two people minimum, or a pallet truck for the very largest. You'll get a dispatch email with a tracking link; the courier will text or email a delivery window the day before.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAssembly is the bigger task in this category — 2-3 hours for sheds up to 6×4 ft with two people, longer for larger units. You'll want a screwdriver, a 10mm spanner, a level, and a step-ladder for the roof. Manufacturer-quoted times tend to be optimistic by 30-50% on first build. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/assembly\"\u003eassembly help page\u003c\/a\u003e for tools, time estimates, and where to book a Tasker if you'd rather not DIY.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eReturns and consumer protection\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEvery order is covered by your full UK consumer protections:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConsumer Rights Act 2015\u003c\/strong\u003e — the goods must be of satisfactory quality, fit for purpose, and as described. Your statutory rights apply automatically and never expire.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConsumer Contracts Regulations 2013\u003c\/strong\u003e — 14 days from receipt to change your mind, no reason needed. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/returns\"\u003ereturns page\u003c\/a\u003e for the process.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e30-day damaged-on-arrival guarantee\u003c\/strong\u003e — if anything's wrong on delivery, email us with photos and we'll arrange a free replacement or full refund including return postage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor order questions, delivery updates, or post-purchase support, email \u003ca href=\"mailto:hello@garden-storage.com\"\u003ehello@garden-storage.com\u003c\/a\u003e or call \u003ca href=\"tel:+447383567839\"\u003e+44 7383 567839\u003c\/a\u003e Mon–Fri 9am–5pm. We respond to email within one UK working day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCommon questions about sheds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDo I need planning permission?\u003c\/strong\u003e In England, sheds under 2.5m high covering less than 50% of garden area are usually permitted development. Conservation Areas, listed buildings and AONBs have stricter rules — check with your council.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat's covered by the warranty?\u003c\/strong\u003e Manufacturer-specific structural warranties apply (typically 5-10 years for plastic, 10-20 for metal galvanised). Your Consumer Rights Act 2015 protections apply on top — satisfactory quality, fit for purpose, as described — and never expire.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow does insurance work for stored contents?\u003c\/strong\u003e Most home contents policies cover items in outbuildings up to a stated limit (often £1,000-£3,000), with conditions about lock type and structure. Check your policy schedule before storing anything high-value.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor more on sheds, see our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/garden-storage-sheds\"\u003esheds buying guide\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Garden Storage","offers":[{"title":"Grey","offer_id":57903899574617,"sku":"GSH-7X4FT-GREY-27","price":550.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1041\/5557\/8713\/files\/S79fcd2bbb9ee4428b22e103ad80a113bp_964952ef-07e7-425b-8091-50f09abb31c7.webp?v=1776959194"},{"product_id":"lockable-garden-shed-grey-6791","title":"Lockable Garden Shed — Black or Grey (compact)","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eA UV-stabilised resin shed that shrugs off rain, doesn't rot and never needs repainting.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMoulded from UV-stabilised resin — the same material we use across our waterproof range, chosen because it doesn't rot, doesn't fade and never needs re-staining. Panels are thicker than most at this price point and joints are sealed rather than painted over, so water genuinely can't creep in.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe door has a reinforced frame and a pre-fitted hasp so you can add your own Sold Secure padlock (sold separately). The floor panels are rated for a walk-behind mower, a mid-size BBQ or a pair of adult bikes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat's included\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e1 × garden shed (flat-packed)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eFoundation brackets (no floor — see care notes)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eLockable door with reinforced frame\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eRidge detail for passive airflow\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eNumbered panels, hardware pack and printed instructions\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDesigned for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eHand tools, a walk-behind mower and garden-power kit\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eBike and tool combined storage where floor space is tight\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003ePotting, hobby or general outdoor workshop space\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eLocked storage for valuable tools or bikes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCare \u0026amp; maintenance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWipe clean with a damp cloth and mild detergent. No annual re-treatment needed; the resin is UV-stabilised so colour fade is minimal. Avoid solvents and power-washing at close range.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"seo-content\"\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat this means for your garden\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Lockable Garden Shed — Grey (Compact) is one of our plastic sheds, sized and engineered for typical UK garden use. A shed is the kind of purchase you make once and keep for a decade — or twice in five years if you buy badly. The notes below explain the full lifecycle picture and where this product sits within it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePlastic and resin construction — what UV-stabilised resin buys you\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlastic garden storage covers a wide quality range. The cheap end is commodity HDPE engineered for two summers; the Lockable Garden Shed — Grey (Compact) sits at the other end — UV-stabilised resin engineered for ten or more.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe differences that determine lifetime:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV stabilisation\u003c\/strong\u003e — additives in the polymer formulation that resist breakdown from sunlight. Without these, plastic goes chalky in 18 months and brittle in 3–4 years. Stabilised plastic stays flexible and structurally sound for a decade or more.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWall thickness\u003c\/strong\u003e — quality resin units use 4mm+ walls, visible at the lid lip. Cheap commodity plastic is 2–3mm and flexes when leaned on.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFrost rating\u003c\/strong\u003e — stabilised resin handles -20°C without cracking. Commodity HDPE goes brittle at -5°C and cracks under impact.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSealed joinery\u003c\/strong\u003e — corner joints and lid gaskets that keep water out. The mark of an engineered product, not a moulded plastic shell.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe differences are usually invisible at the marketing level — manufacturers don't volunteer \"we use cheap plastic\" — but they show up unmistakably after the first 18 months in a UK garden.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSizing and what fits\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe exact dimensions and capacity for this product are in the specifications above. As a general guide for our sheds range:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFootprint\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWhat fits\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4×3 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMower + basic tools\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6×4 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMower, strimmer, hand tools, 1 bike\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8×6 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 bikes, tools, BBQ, garden chairs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10×8 ft+\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorkshop space + storage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInternal dimensions are what matter for fit; external dimensions matter for placement clearance. Quoted capacity is brim-full; usable capacity is roughly 70-80% of that, since you can't pack to the lid and expect to retrieve bottom items.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eUK weather considerations\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBritish gardens see 1,000-1,200mm of annual rainfall, frost cycling between -5°C and +10°C through winter, and summer UV exposure that damages unstabilised materials. The Lockable Garden Shed — Grey (Compact) is engineered against those specific conditions. Practical implications:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFrost\u003c\/strong\u003e — products in this range are rated for sustained sub-zero temperatures without cracking. The cheap alternatives aren't.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV\u003c\/strong\u003e — UV-stabilised plastics, hot-dip galvanised metal, and pressure-treated timber all handle UK summer sun. Commodity equivalents fail visibly within 2–3 years.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWind\u003c\/strong\u003e — exposed gardens (hilltops, coastal locations, wide gardens with no windbreaks) need anchoring. Most products in this range include floor anchor points; use them.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDriving rain\u003c\/strong\u003e — sealed lid gaskets and overhung roof edges keep wind-driven rain out. Look for these features specifically if your site is exposed.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBase preparation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe single most-skipped step on outdoor storage installation. All sheds need a level, solid base. Three good options: concrete slab (gold standard, 25-year base), paving flags on hardcore (cheaper, perfectly fine for sheds up to 8×6 ft), or a pressure-treated timber base on bearers for slightly uneven ground. Don't put a shed directly on grass.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDon't put any storage unit directly on grass. The base will move; lid seals will fail; condensation underneath will accelerate component failure. Plan the base before ordering the product.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDelivery and assembly\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis product ships from our UK warehouse with free mainland delivery on orders over £100. Standard delivery is 5–7 working days, tracked. This product ships pallet-direct to your kerbside. The driver won't bring the pallet down a path, up steps, or inside. Plan for help moving it from the kerb — two people minimum, or a pallet truck for the very largest. You'll get a dispatch email with a tracking link; the courier will text or email a delivery window the day before.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAssembly is the bigger task in this category — 2-3 hours for sheds up to 6×4 ft with two people, longer for larger units. You'll want a screwdriver, a 10mm spanner, a level, and a step-ladder for the roof. Manufacturer-quoted times tend to be optimistic by 30-50% on first build. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/assembly\"\u003eassembly help page\u003c\/a\u003e for tools, time estimates, and where to book a Tasker if you'd rather not DIY.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eReturns and consumer protection\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEvery order is covered by your full UK consumer protections:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConsumer Rights Act 2015\u003c\/strong\u003e — the goods must be of satisfactory quality, fit for purpose, and as described. Your statutory rights apply automatically and never expire.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConsumer Contracts Regulations 2013\u003c\/strong\u003e — 14 days from receipt to change your mind, no reason needed. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/returns\"\u003ereturns page\u003c\/a\u003e for the process.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e30-day damaged-on-arrival guarantee\u003c\/strong\u003e — if anything's wrong on delivery, email us with photos and we'll arrange a free replacement or full refund including return postage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor order questions, delivery updates, or post-purchase support, email \u003ca href=\"mailto:hello@garden-storage.com\"\u003ehello@garden-storage.com\u003c\/a\u003e or call \u003ca href=\"tel:+447383567839\"\u003e+44 7383 567839\u003c\/a\u003e Mon–Fri 9am–5pm. We respond to email within one UK working day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCommon questions about sheds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDo I need planning permission?\u003c\/strong\u003e In England, sheds under 2.5m high covering less than 50% of garden area are usually permitted development. Conservation Areas, listed buildings and AONBs have stricter rules — check with your council.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat's covered by the warranty?\u003c\/strong\u003e Manufacturer-specific structural warranties apply (typically 5-10 years for plastic, 10-20 for metal galvanised). Your Consumer Rights Act 2015 protections apply on top — satisfactory quality, fit for purpose, as described — and never expire.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow does insurance work for stored contents?\u003c\/strong\u003e Most home contents policies cover items in outbuildings up to a stated limit (often £1,000-£3,000), with conditions about lock type and structure. Check your policy schedule before storing anything high-value.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor more on sheds, see our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/garden-storage-sheds\"\u003esheds buying guide\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Garden Storage","offers":[{"title":"Black","offer_id":57903899836761,"sku":"GSH-6X4FT-BLACK-28","price":429.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Grey","offer_id":57903899869529,"sku":"GSH-6X4FT-GREY-28","price":447.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1041\/5557\/8713\/files\/Scf9b70814dfd4045be4dc92a41999fb6l.webp?v=1776959197"},{"product_id":"11-3x9-2-garden-shed-grey","title":"11.3x9.2 Garden Shed — Grey","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eA galvanised steel shed with a powder-coat finish — tidy, honest storage for tools, mowers and garden kit.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBuilt from 0.4mm galvanised steel with a powder-coat finish on top of the zinc layer. That's two barriers between the steel and the weather, which is why the panels don't rust-bloom at the cut edges the way budget alternatives do. Pre-drilled panels and clearly numbered parts keep the flat-pack assembly predictable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIntegrated gable vents stop condensation building up. The floor panels are rated for a walk-behind mower, a mid-size BBQ or a pair of adult bikes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat's included\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e \u003cli\u003e1 × 11.3×9.2ft garden shed (flat-packed)\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eReinforced floor panel and fixings\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eSpring-latch door with retrofit hasp\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eGable vent(s)\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eNumbered panels, hardware pack and printed instructions\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDesigned for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e \u003cli\u003eHand tools, a walk-behind mower and garden-power kit\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eBike and tool combined storage where floor space is tight\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003ePotting, hobby or general outdoor workshop space\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCare \u0026amp; maintenance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWipe clean with a damp cloth. Check bolts once a year, and touch up any exposed steel with enamel paint if a knock breaks the powder-coat. Re-seal the base perimeter if standing water starts to show.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"seo-content\"\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhere this fits in the range\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 11.3x9.2 Garden Shed — Grey is from our plastic shed collection. The decisions you make at purchase — material, size, base preparation, security — determine whether you'll thank yourself in 10 years' time or be replacing the unit halfway through.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePlastic and resin construction — what UV-stabilised resin buys you\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlastic garden storage covers a wide quality range. The cheap end is commodity HDPE engineered for two summers; the 11.3x9.2 Garden Shed — Grey sits at the other end — UV-stabilised resin engineered for ten or more.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe differences that determine lifetime:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV stabilisation\u003c\/strong\u003e — additives in the polymer formulation that resist breakdown from sunlight. Without these, plastic goes chalky in 18 months and brittle in 3–4 years. Stabilised plastic stays flexible and structurally sound for a decade or more.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWall thickness\u003c\/strong\u003e — quality resin units use 4mm+ walls, visible at the lid lip. Cheap commodity plastic is 2–3mm and flexes when leaned on.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFrost rating\u003c\/strong\u003e — stabilised resin handles -20°C without cracking. Commodity HDPE goes brittle at -5°C and cracks under impact.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSealed joinery\u003c\/strong\u003e — corner joints and lid gaskets that keep water out. The mark of an engineered product, not a moulded plastic shell.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe differences are usually invisible at the marketing level — manufacturers don't volunteer \"we use cheap plastic\" — but they show up unmistakably after the first 18 months in a UK garden.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSizing and what fits\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe exact dimensions and capacity for this product are in the specifications above. As a general guide for our sheds range:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFootprint\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWhat fits\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4×3 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMower + basic tools\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6×4 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMower, strimmer, hand tools, 1 bike\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8×6 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 bikes, tools, BBQ, garden chairs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10×8 ft+\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorkshop space + storage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInternal dimensions are what matter for fit; external dimensions matter for placement clearance. Quoted capacity is brim-full; usable capacity is roughly 70-80% of that, since you can't pack to the lid and expect to retrieve bottom items.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eUK weather considerations\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBritish gardens see 1,000-1,200mm of annual rainfall, frost cycling between -5°C and +10°C through winter, and summer UV exposure that damages unstabilised materials. The 11.3x9.2 Garden Shed — Grey is engineered against those specific conditions. Practical implications:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFrost\u003c\/strong\u003e — products in this range are rated for sustained sub-zero temperatures without cracking. The cheap alternatives aren't.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV\u003c\/strong\u003e — UV-stabilised plastics, hot-dip galvanised metal, and pressure-treated timber all handle UK summer sun. Commodity equivalents fail visibly within 2–3 years.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWind\u003c\/strong\u003e — exposed gardens (hilltops, coastal locations, wide gardens with no windbreaks) need anchoring. Most products in this range include floor anchor points; use them.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDriving rain\u003c\/strong\u003e — sealed lid gaskets and overhung roof edges keep wind-driven rain out. Look for these features specifically if your site is exposed.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBase preparation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe single most-skipped step on outdoor storage installation. All sheds need a level, solid base. Three good options: concrete slab (gold standard, 25-year base), paving flags on hardcore (cheaper, perfectly fine for sheds up to 8×6 ft), or a pressure-treated timber base on bearers for slightly uneven ground. Don't put a shed directly on grass.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDon't put any storage unit directly on grass. The base will move; lid seals will fail; condensation underneath will accelerate component failure. Plan the base before ordering the product.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDelivery and assembly\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis product ships from our UK warehouse with free mainland delivery on orders over £100. Standard delivery is 5–7 working days, tracked. This product ships pallet-direct to your kerbside. The driver won't bring the pallet down a path, up steps, or inside. Plan for help moving it from the kerb — two people minimum, or a pallet truck for the very largest. You'll get a dispatch email with a tracking link; the courier will text or email a delivery window the day before.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAssembly is the bigger task in this category — 2-3 hours for sheds up to 6×4 ft with two people, longer for larger units. You'll want a screwdriver, a 10mm spanner, a level, and a step-ladder for the roof. Manufacturer-quoted times tend to be optimistic by 30-50% on first build. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/assembly\"\u003eassembly help page\u003c\/a\u003e for tools, time estimates, and where to book a Tasker if you'd rather not DIY.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eReturns and consumer protection\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEvery order is covered by your full UK consumer protections:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConsumer Rights Act 2015\u003c\/strong\u003e — the goods must be of satisfactory quality, fit for purpose, and as described. Your statutory rights apply automatically and never expire.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConsumer Contracts Regulations 2013\u003c\/strong\u003e — 14 days from receipt to change your mind, no reason needed. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/returns\"\u003ereturns page\u003c\/a\u003e for the process.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e30-day damaged-on-arrival guarantee\u003c\/strong\u003e — if anything's wrong on delivery, email us with photos and we'll arrange a free replacement or full refund including return postage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor order questions, delivery updates, or post-purchase support, email \u003ca href=\"mailto:hello@garden-storage.com\"\u003ehello@garden-storage.com\u003c\/a\u003e or call \u003ca href=\"tel:+447383567839\"\u003e+44 7383 567839\u003c\/a\u003e Mon–Fri 9am–5pm. We respond to email within one UK working day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCommon questions about sheds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDo I need planning permission?\u003c\/strong\u003e In England, sheds under 2.5m high covering less than 50% of garden area are usually permitted development. Conservation Areas, listed buildings and AONBs have stricter rules — check with your council.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat's covered by the warranty?\u003c\/strong\u003e Manufacturer-specific structural warranties apply (typically 5-10 years for plastic, 10-20 for metal galvanised). Your Consumer Rights Act 2015 protections apply on top — satisfactory quality, fit for purpose, as described — and never expire.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow does insurance work for stored contents?\u003c\/strong\u003e Most home contents policies cover items in outbuildings up to a stated limit (often £1,000-£3,000), with conditions about lock type and structure. Check your policy schedule before storing anything high-value.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor more on sheds, see our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/garden-storage-sheds\"\u003esheds buying guide\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Garden Storage","offers":[{"title":"Grey","offer_id":57903900000601,"sku":"GSH-11p3X9p2FT-GREY-29","price":792.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1041\/5557\/8713\/files\/S7831d3e51b1e4e49ae5f260c7804f12dm.webp?v=1776959199"},{"product_id":"garden-shed-grey","title":"Garden Shed — Grey","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eA UV-stabilised resin shed that shrugs off rain, doesn't rot and never needs repainting.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMoulded from UV-stabilised resin — the same material we use across our waterproof range, chosen because it doesn't rot, doesn't fade and never needs re-staining. Panels are thicker than most at this price point and joints are sealed rather than painted over, so water genuinely can't creep in.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe floor panels are rated for a walk-behind mower, a mid-size BBQ or a pair of adult bikes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat's included\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e \u003cli\u003e1 × garden shed (flat-packed)\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eFoundation brackets (no floor — see care notes)\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eSpring-latch door with retrofit hasp\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eRidge detail for passive airflow\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eNumbered panels, hardware pack and printed instructions\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDesigned for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e \u003cli\u003eHand tools, a walk-behind mower and garden-power kit\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eBike and tool combined storage where floor space is tight\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003ePotting, hobby or general outdoor workshop space\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCare \u0026amp; maintenance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWipe clean with a damp cloth and mild detergent. No annual re-treatment needed; the resin is UV-stabilised so colour fade is minimal. Avoid solvents and power-washing at close range.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDelivery is 3–5 working days from dispatch, kerbside by a two-person courier. The flat-pack is palletised for transit, so it arrives with the panels undamaged even after long-haul handling. Keep the packaging until the unit is fully assembled — it doubles as a handy cutting surface for the smaller parts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"seo-content\"\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat this means for your garden\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Garden Shed — Grey is one of our plastic sheds, sized and engineered for typical UK garden use. A shed is the kind of purchase you make once and keep for a decade — or twice in five years if you buy badly. The notes below explain the full lifecycle picture and where this product sits within it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePlastic and resin construction — what UV-stabilised resin buys you\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlastic garden storage covers a wide quality range. The cheap end is commodity HDPE engineered for two summers; the Garden Shed — Grey sits at the other end — UV-stabilised resin engineered for ten or more.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe differences that determine lifetime:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV stabilisation\u003c\/strong\u003e — additives in the polymer formulation that resist breakdown from sunlight. Without these, plastic goes chalky in 18 months and brittle in 3–4 years. Stabilised plastic stays flexible and structurally sound for a decade or more.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWall thickness\u003c\/strong\u003e — quality resin units use 4mm+ walls, visible at the lid lip. Cheap commodity plastic is 2–3mm and flexes when leaned on.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFrost rating\u003c\/strong\u003e — stabilised resin handles -20°C without cracking. Commodity HDPE goes brittle at -5°C and cracks under impact.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSealed joinery\u003c\/strong\u003e — corner joints and lid gaskets that keep water out. The mark of an engineered product, not a moulded plastic shell.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe differences are usually invisible at the marketing level — manufacturers don't volunteer \"we use cheap plastic\" — but they show up unmistakably after the first 18 months in a UK garden.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSizing and what fits\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe exact dimensions and capacity for this product are in the specifications above. As a general guide for our sheds range:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFootprint\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWhat fits\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4×3 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMower + basic tools\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6×4 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMower, strimmer, hand tools, 1 bike\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8×6 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 bikes, tools, BBQ, garden chairs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10×8 ft+\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorkshop space + storage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInternal dimensions are what matter for fit; external dimensions matter for placement clearance. Quoted capacity is brim-full; usable capacity is roughly 70-80% of that, since you can't pack to the lid and expect to retrieve bottom items.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eUK weather considerations\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBritish gardens see 1,000-1,200mm of annual rainfall, frost cycling between -5°C and +10°C through winter, and summer UV exposure that damages unstabilised materials. The Garden Shed — Grey is engineered against those specific conditions. Practical implications:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFrost\u003c\/strong\u003e — products in this range are rated for sustained sub-zero temperatures without cracking. The cheap alternatives aren't.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV\u003c\/strong\u003e — UV-stabilised plastics, hot-dip galvanised metal, and pressure-treated timber all handle UK summer sun. Commodity equivalents fail visibly within 2–3 years.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWind\u003c\/strong\u003e — exposed gardens (hilltops, coastal locations, wide gardens with no windbreaks) need anchoring. Most products in this range include floor anchor points; use them.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDriving rain\u003c\/strong\u003e — sealed lid gaskets and overhung roof edges keep wind-driven rain out. Look for these features specifically if your site is exposed.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBase preparation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe single most-skipped step on outdoor storage installation. All sheds need a level, solid base. Three good options: concrete slab (gold standard, 25-year base), paving flags on hardcore (cheaper, perfectly fine for sheds up to 8×6 ft), or a pressure-treated timber base on bearers for slightly uneven ground. Don't put a shed directly on grass.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDon't put any storage unit directly on grass. The base will move; lid seals will fail; condensation underneath will accelerate component failure. Plan the base before ordering the product.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDelivery and assembly\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis product ships from our UK warehouse with free mainland delivery on orders over £100. Standard delivery is 5–7 working days, tracked. This product ships pallet-direct to your kerbside. The driver won't bring the pallet down a path, up steps, or inside. Plan for help moving it from the kerb — two people minimum, or a pallet truck for the very largest. You'll get a dispatch email with a tracking link; the courier will text or email a delivery window the day before.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAssembly is the bigger task in this category — 2-3 hours for sheds up to 6×4 ft with two people, longer for larger units. You'll want a screwdriver, a 10mm spanner, a level, and a step-ladder for the roof. Manufacturer-quoted times tend to be optimistic by 30-50% on first build. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/assembly\"\u003eassembly help page\u003c\/a\u003e for tools, time estimates, and where to book a Tasker if you'd rather not DIY.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eReturns and consumer protection\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEvery order is covered by your full UK consumer protections:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConsumer Rights Act 2015\u003c\/strong\u003e — the goods must be of satisfactory quality, fit for purpose, and as described. Your statutory rights apply automatically and never expire.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConsumer Contracts Regulations 2013\u003c\/strong\u003e — 14 days from receipt to change your mind, no reason needed. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/returns\"\u003ereturns page\u003c\/a\u003e for the process.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e30-day damaged-on-arrival guarantee\u003c\/strong\u003e — if anything's wrong on delivery, email us with photos and we'll arrange a free replacement or full refund including return postage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor order questions, delivery updates, or post-purchase support, email \u003ca href=\"mailto:hello@garden-storage.com\"\u003ehello@garden-storage.com\u003c\/a\u003e or call \u003ca href=\"tel:+447383567839\"\u003e+44 7383 567839\u003c\/a\u003e Mon–Fri 9am–5pm. We respond to email within one UK working day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCommon questions about sheds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDo I need planning permission?\u003c\/strong\u003e In England, sheds under 2.5m high covering less than 50% of garden area are usually permitted development. Conservation Areas, listed buildings and AONBs have stricter rules — check with your council.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat's covered by the warranty?\u003c\/strong\u003e Manufacturer-specific structural warranties apply (typically 5-10 years for plastic, 10-20 for metal galvanised). Your Consumer Rights Act 2015 protections apply on top — satisfactory quality, fit for purpose, as described — and never expire.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow does insurance work for stored contents?\u003c\/strong\u003e Most home contents policies cover items in outbuildings up to a stated limit (often £1,000-£3,000), with conditions about lock type and structure. Check your policy schedule before storing anything high-value.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor more on sheds, see our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/garden-storage-sheds\"\u003esheds buying guide\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Garden Storage","offers":[{"title":"Grey","offer_id":57903900557657,"sku":"GSH-STD-GREY-30","price":311.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1041\/5557\/8713\/files\/S04e9f192869240f686d69f3a15716967k.webp?v=1776959201"},{"product_id":"garden-shed-beige","title":"Garden Shed — Beige","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eA pressure-treated FSC pine shed with tongue-and-groove cladding — real carpentry, not just screwed panels.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBuilt from FSC-certified pine, pressure-treated against rot and rebuffed with a smooth planed finish. The cladding is 12mm — thicker than the high-street budget kits — and the corners are rebated rather than simply butt-jointed, so the frame stays square once it's up. Re-treat every two to three years with a clear wood oil and it'll outlast most plastic alternatives.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe floor panels are rated for a walk-behind mower, a mid-size BBQ or a pair of adult bikes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat's included\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e \u003cli\u003e1 × garden shed (flat-packed)\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eFoundation brackets (no floor — see care notes)\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eSpring-latch door with retrofit hasp\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eRidge detail for passive airflow\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eNumbered panels, hardware pack and printed instructions\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDesigned for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e \u003cli\u003eHand tools, a walk-behind mower and garden-power kit\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003eBike and tool combined storage where floor space is tight\u003c\/li\u003e \u003cli\u003ePotting, hobby or general outdoor workshop space\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCare \u0026amp; maintenance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRe-treat every two to three years with a clear wood oil or decking stain — the pressure-treatment is the first line of defence, not the only one. Keep the base off saturated ground if you can, and wipe clean with a damp cloth as needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"seo-content\"\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat this means for your garden\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Garden Shed — Beige is one of our plastic sheds, sized and engineered for typical UK garden use. A shed is the kind of purchase you make once and keep for a decade — or twice in five years if you buy badly. The notes below explain the full lifecycle picture and where this product sits within it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePlastic and resin construction — what UV-stabilised resin buys you\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlastic garden storage covers a wide quality range. The cheap end is commodity HDPE engineered for two summers; the Garden Shed — Beige sits at the other end — UV-stabilised resin engineered for ten or more.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe differences that determine lifetime:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV stabilisation\u003c\/strong\u003e — additives in the polymer formulation that resist breakdown from sunlight. Without these, plastic goes chalky in 18 months and brittle in 3–4 years. Stabilised plastic stays flexible and structurally sound for a decade or more.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWall thickness\u003c\/strong\u003e — quality resin units use 4mm+ walls, visible at the lid lip. Cheap commodity plastic is 2–3mm and flexes when leaned on.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFrost rating\u003c\/strong\u003e — stabilised resin handles -20°C without cracking. Commodity HDPE goes brittle at -5°C and cracks under impact.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSealed joinery\u003c\/strong\u003e — corner joints and lid gaskets that keep water out. The mark of an engineered product, not a moulded plastic shell.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe differences are usually invisible at the marketing level — manufacturers don't volunteer \"we use cheap plastic\" — but they show up unmistakably after the first 18 months in a UK garden.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSizing and what fits\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe exact dimensions and capacity for this product are in the specifications above. As a general guide for our sheds range:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFootprint\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWhat fits\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4×3 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMower + basic tools\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6×4 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMower, strimmer, hand tools, 1 bike\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8×6 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 bikes, tools, BBQ, garden chairs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10×8 ft+\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorkshop space + storage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInternal dimensions are what matter for fit; external dimensions matter for placement clearance. Quoted capacity is brim-full; usable capacity is roughly 70-80% of that, since you can't pack to the lid and expect to retrieve bottom items.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eUK weather considerations\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBritish gardens see 1,000-1,200mm of annual rainfall, frost cycling between -5°C and +10°C through winter, and summer UV exposure that damages unstabilised materials. The Garden Shed — Beige is engineered against those specific conditions. Practical implications:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFrost\u003c\/strong\u003e — products in this range are rated for sustained sub-zero temperatures without cracking. The cheap alternatives aren't.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV\u003c\/strong\u003e — UV-stabilised plastics, hot-dip galvanised metal, and pressure-treated timber all handle UK summer sun. Commodity equivalents fail visibly within 2–3 years.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWind\u003c\/strong\u003e — exposed gardens (hilltops, coastal locations, wide gardens with no windbreaks) need anchoring. Most products in this range include floor anchor points; use them.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDriving rain\u003c\/strong\u003e — sealed lid gaskets and overhung roof edges keep wind-driven rain out. Look for these features specifically if your site is exposed.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBase preparation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe single most-skipped step on outdoor storage installation. All sheds need a level, solid base. Three good options: concrete slab (gold standard, 25-year base), paving flags on hardcore (cheaper, perfectly fine for sheds up to 8×6 ft), or a pressure-treated timber base on bearers for slightly uneven ground. Don't put a shed directly on grass.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDon't put any storage unit directly on grass. The base will move; lid seals will fail; condensation underneath will accelerate component failure. Plan the base before ordering the product.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDelivery and assembly\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis product ships from our UK warehouse with free mainland delivery on orders over £100. Standard delivery is 5–7 working days, tracked. This product ships pallet-direct to your kerbside. The driver won't bring the pallet down a path, up steps, or inside. Plan for help moving it from the kerb — two people minimum, or a pallet truck for the very largest. You'll get a dispatch email with a tracking link; the courier will text or email a delivery window the day before.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAssembly is the bigger task in this category — 2-3 hours for sheds up to 6×4 ft with two people, longer for larger units. You'll want a screwdriver, a 10mm spanner, a level, and a step-ladder for the roof. Manufacturer-quoted times tend to be optimistic by 30-50% on first build. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/assembly\"\u003eassembly help page\u003c\/a\u003e for tools, time estimates, and where to book a Tasker if you'd rather not DIY.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eReturns and consumer protection\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEvery order is covered by your full UK consumer protections:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConsumer Rights Act 2015\u003c\/strong\u003e — the goods must be of satisfactory quality, fit for purpose, and as described. Your statutory rights apply automatically and never expire.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConsumer Contracts Regulations 2013\u003c\/strong\u003e — 14 days from receipt to change your mind, no reason needed. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/returns\"\u003ereturns page\u003c\/a\u003e for the process.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e30-day damaged-on-arrival guarantee\u003c\/strong\u003e — if anything's wrong on delivery, email us with photos and we'll arrange a free replacement or full refund including return postage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor order questions, delivery updates, or post-purchase support, email \u003ca href=\"mailto:hello@garden-storage.com\"\u003ehello@garden-storage.com\u003c\/a\u003e or call \u003ca href=\"tel:+447383567839\"\u003e+44 7383 567839\u003c\/a\u003e Mon–Fri 9am–5pm. We respond to email within one UK working day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCommon questions about sheds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDo I need planning permission?\u003c\/strong\u003e In England, sheds under 2.5m high covering less than 50% of garden area are usually permitted development. Conservation Areas, listed buildings and AONBs have stricter rules — check with your council.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat's covered by the warranty?\u003c\/strong\u003e Manufacturer-specific structural warranties apply (typically 5-10 years for plastic, 10-20 for metal galvanised). Your Consumer Rights Act 2015 protections apply on top — satisfactory quality, fit for purpose, as described — and never expire.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow does insurance work for stored contents?\u003c\/strong\u003e Most home contents policies cover items in outbuildings up to a stated limit (often £1,000-£3,000), with conditions about lock type and structure. Check your policy schedule before storing anything high-value.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor more on sheds, see our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/garden-storage-sheds\"\u003esheds buying guide\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Garden Storage","offers":[{"title":"Beige","offer_id":57903902425433,"sku":"GSH-12X10FT-BEIGE-42","price":1498.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1041\/5557\/8713\/files\/S2d2122a7df2c4b24b8e1c3324ef6083b3.webp?v=1776959226"},{"product_id":"workshop-shed-with-storage-area","title":"Workshop Shed, With Storage Area","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Workshop Shed with Storage Area is a UK-crafted garden building designed to work as hard as you do, combining a proper workspace with generous storage and an integrated log store. Double-door access makes it easy to move tools, equipment or firewood in and out.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eMade from pressure-treated timber, it offers long-lasting resistance to rot, while robust cladding, strong flooring and a weather-resistant roof keep the contents dry and secure. The built-in log store keeps firewood organised and seasoning under cover.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCombined workshop and storage area\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIntegrated dry log store\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePressure-treated, rot-resistant timber\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDouble-door access, weather-resistant roof\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eAvailable in a natural light green or brown finish and designed for straightforward assembly and customisation, it is a versatile garden workshop and storage solution built to last.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Arbor Garden Solutions","offers":[{"title":"10 x 8 \/ Rustic Brown \/ Without Expert Assembly","offer_id":58531534799193,"sku":"WSwSA-10X8FT-BROWN","price":2469.25,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"10 x 8 \/ Rustic Brown \/ With Expert Assembly","offer_id":58531534831961,"sku":"WSwSA-10X8FT-BROWN","price":2969.05,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"10 x 8 \/ Natural (Light Green) \/ Without Expert Assembly","offer_id":58531534864729,"sku":"WSwSA-10X8FT-LG","price":2469.25,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"10 x 8 \/ Natural (Light Green) \/ With Expert Assembly","offer_id":58531534897497,"sku":"WSwSA-10X8FT-LG","price":2969.05,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"12 x 8 \/ Rustic Brown \/ Without Expert Assembly","offer_id":58531534930265,"sku":"WSwSA-12X8FT-BROWN","price":2729.35,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"12 x 8 \/ Rustic Brown \/ With Expert Assembly","offer_id":58531534963033,"sku":"WSwSA-12X8FT-BROWN","price":3229.15,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"12 x 8 \/ Natural (Light Green) \/ Without Expert Assembly","offer_id":58531534995801,"sku":"WSwSA-12X8FT-LG","price":2729.35,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"12 x 8 \/ Natural (Light Green) \/ With Expert Assembly","offer_id":58531535028569,"sku":"WSwSA-12X8FT-LG","price":3229.15,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"12 x 10 \/ Rustic Brown \/ Without Expert Assembly","offer_id":58531535061337,"sku":"WSwSA-12X10FT-BROWN","price":3649.05,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"12 x 10 \/ Rustic Brown \/ With Expert Assembly","offer_id":58531535094105,"sku":"WSwSA-12X10FT-BROWN","price":4148.85,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"12 x 10 \/ Natural (Light Green) \/ Without Expert Assembly","offer_id":58531535126873,"sku":"WSwSA-12X10FT-LG","price":3649.05,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"12 x 10 \/ Natural (Light Green) \/ With Expert Assembly","offer_id":58531535159641,"sku":"WSwSA-12X10FT-LG","price":4148.85,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"14 x 8 \/ Rustic Brown \/ Without Expert Assembly","offer_id":58531535192409,"sku":"WSwSA-14X8FT-BROWN","price":3048.95,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"14 x 8 \/ Rustic Brown \/ With Expert Assembly","offer_id":58531535225177,"sku":"WSwSA-14X8FT-BROWN","price":3548.75,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"14 x 8 \/ Natural (Light Green) \/ Without Expert Assembly","offer_id":58531535257945,"sku":"WSwSA-14X8FT-LG","price":3048.95,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"14 x 8 \/ Natural (Light Green) \/ With Expert Assembly","offer_id":58531535290713,"sku":"WSwSA-14X8FT-LG","price":3548.75,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"14 x 10 \/ Rustic Brown \/ Without Expert Assembly","offer_id":58531535323481,"sku":"WSwSA-14x10-BROWN","price":4098.7,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"14 x 10 \/ Rustic Brown \/ With Expert Assembly","offer_id":58531535356249,"sku":"WSwSA-14x10-BROWN","price":4599.35,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"14 x 10 \/ Natural (Light Green) \/ Without Expert Assembly","offer_id":58531535389017,"sku":"WSwSA-14x10-LG","price":4098.7,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"14 x 10 \/ Natural (Light Green) \/ With Expert Assembly","offer_id":58531535421785,"sku":"WSwSA-14x10-LG","price":4599.35,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"16 x 8 \/ Rustic Brown \/ Without Expert Assembly","offer_id":58531535454553,"sku":"WSwSA-16x8-BROWN","price":3598.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"16 x 8 \/ Rustic Brown \/ With Expert Assembly","offer_id":58531535487321,"sku":"WSwSA-16x8-BROWN","price":4098.7,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"16 x 8 \/ Natural (Light Green) \/ Without Expert Assembly","offer_id":58531535520089,"sku":"WSwSA-16x8-LG","price":3598.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"16 x 8 \/ Natural (Light Green) \/ With Expert Assembly","offer_id":58531535552857,"sku":"WSwSA-16x8-LG","price":4098.7,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"16 x 10 \/ Rustic Brown \/ Without Expert Assembly","offer_id":58531535585625,"sku":"WSwSA-16X10FT-BROWN","price":4528.8,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"16 x 10 \/ Rustic Brown \/ With Expert Assembly","offer_id":58531535618393,"sku":"WSwSA-16X10FT-BROWN","price":5029.45,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"16 x 10 \/ Natural (Light Green) \/ Without Expert Assembly","offer_id":58531535651161,"sku":"WSwSA-16X10FT-LG","price":4528.8,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"16 x 10 \/ Natural (Light Green) \/ With Expert Assembly","offer_id":58531535683929,"sku":"WSwSA-16X10FT-LG","price":5029.45,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"20 x 10 \/ Rustic Brown \/ Without Expert Assembly","offer_id":58531535716697,"sku":"WSwSA-20X10FT-BROWN","price":5479.1,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"20 x 10 \/ Rustic Brown \/ With Expert Assembly","offer_id":58531535749465,"sku":"WSwSA-20X10FT-BROWN","price":5978.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"20 x 10 \/ Natural (Light Green) \/ Without Expert Assembly","offer_id":58531535782233,"sku":"WSwSA-20X10FT-LG","price":5479.1,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"20 x 10 \/ Natural (Light Green) \/ With Expert Assembly","offer_id":58531535815001,"sku":"WSwSA-20X10FT-LG","price":5978.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1041\/5557\/8713\/files\/shel-log-storage-brown-1.jpg?v=1783519689"},{"product_id":"alleyway-sheds","title":"Alleyway Sheds","description":"\u003cp\u003eOur alleyway sheds are tailor-made to reclaim the forgotten corners and narrow side returns of your property, turning wasted space into genuinely useful storage. Compact in footprint yet surprisingly roomy inside, they keep gardening tools, power tools, seasonal decorations and children's toys out of the garage and neatly tucked away.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eEach shed is crafted from top-quality Swedish timber and topped with high-performance roofing felt, so it is built to last as well as to impress. The tongue and groove shiplap cladding gives a robust, handsome exterior that slots naturally into your garden's character.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eBest of all, these sheds are fully customisable. From overall size to the finer design details, you can shape a build that fits your space and taste exactly, blending your own vision with our craftsmanship for a storage solution made just for you.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Arbor Garden Solutions","offers":[{"title":"2.1m \/ 120cm \/ Single Door","offer_id":58531552461145,"sku":"AS-AS-120cm-AS-2.1m-AS-SD","price":604.35,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"2.1m \/ 120cm \/ Double Door (Front and Back)","offer_id":58531552493913,"sku":"AS-AS-120cm-AS-2.1m-AS-DD","price":703.8,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"2.1m \/ 150cm \/ Single Door","offer_id":58531552526681,"sku":"AS-AS-150cm-AS-2.1m-AS-SD","price":717.4,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"2.1m \/ 150cm \/ Double Door (Front and Back)","offer_id":58531552559449,"sku":"AS-AS-150cm-AS-2.1m-AS-DD","price":816.85,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"2.1m \/ 180cm \/ Single Door","offer_id":58531552592217,"sku":"AS-AS-180cm-AS-2.1m-AS-SD","price":829.6,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"2.1m \/ 180cm \/ Double Door (Front and Back)","offer_id":58531552624985,"sku":"AS-AS-180cm-AS-2.1m-AS-DD","price":929.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"2.4m \/ 120cm \/ Single Door","offer_id":58531552657753,"sku":"AS-AS-120cm-AS-2.4m-AS-SD","price":668.1,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"2.4m \/ 120cm \/ Double Door (Front and Back)","offer_id":58531552690521,"sku":"AS-AS-120cm-AS-2.4m-AS-DD","price":768.4,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"2.4m \/ 150cm \/ Single Door","offer_id":58531552723289,"sku":"AS-AS-150cm-AS-2.4m-AS-SD","price":798.15,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"2.4m \/ 150cm \/ Double Door (Front and Back)","offer_id":58531552756057,"sku":"AS-AS-150cm-AS-2.4m-AS-DD","price":897.6,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"2.4m \/ 180cm \/ Single Door","offer_id":58531552788825,"sku":"AS-AS-180cm-AS-2.4m-AS-SD","price":928.2,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"2.4m \/ 180cm \/ Double Door (Front and Back)","offer_id":58531552821593,"sku":"AS-AS-180cm-AS-2.4m-AS-DD","price":1027.65,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"2.7m \/ 120cm \/ Single Door","offer_id":58531552854361,"sku":"AS-AS-120cm-AS-2.7m-AS-SD","price":732.7,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"2.7m \/ 120cm \/ Double Door (Front and Back)","offer_id":58531552887129,"sku":"AS-AS-120cm-AS-2.7m-AS-DD","price":833.0,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"2.7m \/ 150cm \/ Single Door","offer_id":58531552919897,"sku":"AS-AS-150cm-AS-2.7m-AS-SD","price":878.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"2.7m \/ 150cm \/ Double Door (Front and Back)","offer_id":58531552952665,"sku":"AS-AS-150cm-AS-2.7m-AS-DD","price":979.2,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"2.7m \/ 180cm \/ Single Door","offer_id":58531552985433,"sku":"AS-AS-180cm-AS-2.7m-AS-SD","price":1025.1,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"2.7m \/ 180cm \/ Double Door (Front and Back)","offer_id":58531553018201,"sku":"AS-AS-180cm-AS-2.7m-AS-DD","price":1125.4,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"3m \/ 120cm \/ Single Door","offer_id":58531553050969,"sku":"AS-AS-120cm-AS-3m-AS-SD","price":798.15,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"3m \/ 120cm \/ Double Door (Front and Back)","offer_id":58531553083737,"sku":"AS-AS-120cm-AS-3m-AS-DD","price":897.6,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"3m \/ 150cm \/ Single Door","offer_id":58531553116505,"sku":"AS-AS-150cm-AS-3m-AS-SD","price":959.65,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"3m \/ 150cm \/ Double Door (Front and Back)","offer_id":58531553149273,"sku":"AS-AS-150cm-AS-3m-AS-DD","price":1059.95,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"3m \/ 180cm \/ Single Door","offer_id":58531553182041,"sku":"AS-AS-180cm-AS-3m-AS-SD","price":1122.0,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"3m \/ 180cm \/ Double Door (Front and Back)","offer_id":58531553214809,"sku":"AS-AS-180cm-AS-3m-AS-DD","price":1222.3,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.3m \/ 120cm \/ Single Door","offer_id":58531553247577,"sku":"AS-AS-120cm-AS-3.3m-AS-SD","price":862.75,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.3m \/ 120cm \/ Double Door (Front and Back)","offer_id":58531553280345,"sku":"AS-AS-120cm-AS-3.3m-AS-DD","price":963.05,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.3m \/ 150cm \/ Single Door","offer_id":58531553313113,"sku":"AS-AS-150cm-AS-3.3m-AS-SD","price":1041.25,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.3m \/ 150cm \/ Double Door (Front and Back)","offer_id":58531553345881,"sku":"AS-AS-150cm-AS-3.3m-AS-DD","price":1140.7,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.3m \/ 180cm \/ Single Door","offer_id":58531553378649,"sku":"AS-AS-180cm-AS-3.3m-AS-SD","price":1218.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.3m \/ 180cm \/ Double Door (Front and Back)","offer_id":58531553411417,"sku":"AS-AS-180cm-AS-3.3m-AS-DD","price":1319.2,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.6m \/ 120cm \/ Single Door","offer_id":58531553444185,"sku":"AS-AS-120cm-AS-3.6m-AS-SD","price":928.2,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.6m \/ 120cm \/ Double Door (Front and Back)","offer_id":58531553476953,"sku":"AS-AS-120cm-AS-3.6m-AS-DD","price":1027.65,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.6m \/ 150cm \/ Single Door","offer_id":58531553509721,"sku":"AS-AS-150cm-AS-3.6m-AS-SD","price":1122.0,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.6m \/ 150cm \/ Double Door (Front and Back)","offer_id":58531553542489,"sku":"AS-AS-150cm-AS-3.6m-AS-DD","price":1222.3,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.6m \/ 180cm \/ Single Door","offer_id":58531553575257,"sku":"AS-AS-180cm-AS-3.6m-AS-SD","price":1315.8,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.6m \/ 180cm \/ Double Door (Front and Back)","offer_id":58531553608025,"sku":"AS-AS-180cm-AS-3.6m-AS-DD","price":1416.1,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.9m \/ 120cm \/ Single Door","offer_id":58531553640793,"sku":"AS-AS-120cm-AS-3.9m-AS-SD","price":991.95,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.9m \/ 120cm \/ Double Door (Front and Back)","offer_id":58531553673561,"sku":"AS-AS-120cm-AS-3.9m-AS-DD","price":1092.25,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.9m \/ 150cm \/ Single Door","offer_id":58531553706329,"sku":"AS-AS-150cm-AS-3.9m-AS-SD","price":1202.75,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.9m \/ 150cm \/ Double Door (Front and Back)","offer_id":58531553739097,"sku":"AS-AS-150cm-AS-3.9m-AS-DD","price":1303.05,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.9m \/ 180cm \/ Single Door","offer_id":58531553771865,"sku":"AS-AS-180cm-AS-3.9m-AS-SD","price":1414.4,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.9m \/ 180cm \/ Double Door (Front and Back)","offer_id":58531553804633,"sku":"AS-AS-180cm-AS-3.9m-AS-DD","price":1513.85,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"4.2m \/ 120cm \/ Single Door","offer_id":58531553837401,"sku":"AS-AS-120cm-AS-4.2m-AS-SD","price":1057.4,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"4.2m \/ 120cm \/ Double Door (Front and Back)","offer_id":58531553870169,"sku":"AS-AS-120cm-AS-4.2m-AS-DD","price":1456.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"4.2m \/ 150cm \/ Single Door","offer_id":58531553902937,"sku":"AS-AS-150cm-AS-4.2m-AS-SD","price":1284.35,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"4.2m \/ 150cm \/ Double Door (Front and Back)","offer_id":58531553935705,"sku":"AS-AS-150cm-AS-4.2m-AS-DD","price":1383.8,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"4.2m \/ 180cm \/ Single Door","offer_id":58531553968473,"sku":"AS-AS-180cm-AS-4.2m-AS-SD","price":1511.3,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"4.2m \/ 180cm \/ Double Door (Front and Back)","offer_id":58531554001241,"sku":"AS-AS-180cm-AS-4.2m-AS-DD","price":1610.75,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"4.5m \/ 120cm \/ Single Door","offer_id":58531554034009,"sku":"AS-AS-120cm-AS-4.5m-AS-SD","price":1122.0,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"4.5m \/ 120cm \/ Double Door (Front and Back)","offer_id":58531554066777,"sku":"AS-AS-120cm-AS-4.5m-AS-DD","price":1222.3,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"4.5m \/ 150cm \/ Single Door","offer_id":58531554099545,"sku":"AS-AS-150cm-AS-4.5m-AS-SD","price":1365.1,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"4.5m \/ 150cm \/ Double Door (Front and Back)","offer_id":58531554132313,"sku":"AS-AS-150cm-AS-4.5m-AS-DD","price":1465.4,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"4.5m \/ 180cm \/ Single Door","offer_id":58531554165081,"sku":"AS-AS-180cm-AS-4.5m-AS-SD","price":1608.2,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"4.5m \/ 180cm \/ Double Door (Front and Back)","offer_id":58531554197849,"sku":"AS-AS-180cm-AS-4.5m-AS-DD","price":1707.65,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1041\/5557\/8713\/files\/Alleyway_Shed_2100x1200-natural-finish.jpg?v=1783519691"},{"product_id":"outsunny-6-6-x-7-8ft-outdoor-garden-storage-shed-waterproof-bike-tent-with-roll-up-zipper-door-galvanised-metal-frame-portable-shed-shelter-carport-for-motorcycle-garden-tools-dark-grey","title":"Outsunny 6.6 x 7.8ft Outdoor Garden Storage Shed, Waterproof Bike Tent with Roll-up Zipper Door, Galvanised Metal Frame, Portable Shed Shelter Carport for Motorcycle Garden Tools, Dark Grey","description":"\u003cp\u003eTired of a cluttered garden and the constant worry of weather damaging your bikes? The anxiety over rust from rain or instability in the wind can spoil your peace of mind. The Outsunny bike storage tent offers a reassuring solution. Its dual-room frame provides steadfast stability, while the all-weather PE fabric shields your valuables. Finally, you can enjoy an organised, secure space and a truly clutter-free Garden.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFeatures:\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul style=\"list-style:disc;margin-left:15px;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGalvanised metal frame structure boosts wind-resistance and overall stability\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUses 160gsm PE fabric, providing all-weather protection from rain and UV rays\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIncludes expansion bolts and ground stakes for secure anchoring on any surface\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGenerous inner offers practical daily storage for bicycles, tools and outdoor equipment\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eA large roll-up zipped door ensures easy access for bulky items\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSimple setup with instructions, allowing you to build it quickly\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003e Specification:\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul style=\"list-style:disc;margin-left:15px;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eColour: Dark Grey\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMaterial: Galvanised Metal, PE\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOverall Dimension: 200W x 238D x 183H cm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEave Height: 133H cm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eInner Dimensions: 195W x 232D x 180H cm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDoor Dimensions: 170W x 128H cm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eItem Label: 84H-516V00CG\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003ePackage Includes:\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul style=\"list-style:disc;margin-left:15px;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1 x Garden Storage Shed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e6 x Expansion Screw\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e6 x Ground Stake\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e16 x Bungee Cord\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1 x Manual\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e","brand":"Wise Galleria","offers":[{"title":"Dark Grey","offer_id":58573715734873,"sku":"84H-516V00CG","price":161.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1041\/5557\/8713\/files\/Y7h04919d6f562802.jpg?v=1783865181"},{"product_id":"outsunny-8-x-6-ft-outdoor-garden-storage-shed-waterproof-bike-tent-with-roll-up-zipper-door-dark-grey","title":"Outsunny 8 x 6 ft Outdoor Garden Storage Shed, Waterproof Bike Tent with Roll-Up Zipper Door, Dark Grey","description":"\u003cp\u003eTired of your garden clutter and the constant worry of rain or harsh winds damaging your bikes? Imagine a disorganized space that detracts from your home's appeal. The Outsunny bike storage tent provides a secure haven. Its robust, weather-resistant build and stable frame offer peace of mind, while the chic, modern design of this outdoor garden storage shed enhances your garden, neatly protecting your belongings without sacrificing style.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFeatures:\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul style=\"list-style:disc;margin-left:15px;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReinforced steel frame with guy ropes provides exceptional stability\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ewithstands 5-6 level winds\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eApex roof and 160g\/㎡ waterproof fabric prevent water buildup\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ekeeps items always dry\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFeatures a stylish faux metal shed look\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ebeautifies your garden with a small footprint\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTop mesh window promotes air circulation\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eprevents moisture and mildew on stored items\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eExtra-large 168 cm roll-up door allows for easy access to bulky equipment\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpacious inner serves as a versatile multi-purpose storage solution\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSimple hook-and-loop assembly requires minimal tools\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eallows for a quick and easy setup\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003e Specification:\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul style=\"list-style:disc;margin-left:15px;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eColour: Dark Grey\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMaterial: Steel, PE\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOverall Dimension: 247W x 180D x 202H cm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEave Height: 158H cm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eInner Dimensions: 229W x 176D x 200H cm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDoor Dimensions: 168W x 150H cm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eVent Dimensions: 48W x 15.5H cm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eItem Label: 84H-515V00CG\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003ePackage Includes:\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul style=\"list-style:disc;margin-left:15px;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1 x Garden Shed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e17 x Bungee Cord\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e4 x Expansion Screw\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e4 x Ground Stake\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1 x Manual\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e","brand":"Wise Galleria","offers":[{"title":"Dark Grey","offer_id":58573715767641,"sku":"84H-515V00CG","price":202.49,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1041\/5557\/8713\/files\/TMSd4719c56931df7.jpg?v=1783865181"}],"url":"https:\/\/garden-storage.com\/collections\/garden-storage-sheds.oembed?page=2","provider":"Garden Storage","version":"1.0","type":"link"}